WO2024169571A1 - 马达、摄像模组以及电子设备 - Google Patents

马达、摄像模组以及电子设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024169571A1
WO2024169571A1 PCT/CN2024/074352 CN2024074352W WO2024169571A1 WO 2024169571 A1 WO2024169571 A1 WO 2024169571A1 CN 2024074352 W CN2024074352 W CN 2024074352W WO 2024169571 A1 WO2024169571 A1 WO 2024169571A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
shake
bracket
magnetic component
focus
coil
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2024/074352
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
侯清
郑科
刘彬
唐玮
秦诗鑫
李邓峰
王鹏
张百亮
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority to EP24755946.1A priority Critical patent/EP4579320A4/en
Publication of WO2024169571A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024169571A1/zh
Priority to US19/178,025 priority patent/US20250244637A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04M—TELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00—Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/02—Constructional features of telephone sets
    • H04M1/0202—Portable telephone sets, e.g. cordless phones, mobile phones or bar type handsets
    • H04M1/026—Details of the structure or mounting of specific components
    • H04M1/0264—Details of the structure or mounting of specific components for a camera module assembly
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B27/00—Optical systems or apparatus not provided for by any of the groups G02B1/00 - G02B26/00, G02B30/00
    • G02B27/64—Imaging systems using optical elements for stabilisation of the lateral and angular position of the image
    • G02B27/646—Imaging systems using optical elements for stabilisation of the lateral and angular position of the image compensating for small deviations, e.g. due to vibration or shake
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B7/00—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements
    • G02B7/02—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses
    • G02B7/04—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses with mechanism for focusing or varying magnification
    • G02B7/08—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses with mechanism for focusing or varying magnification adapted to co-operate with a remote control mechanism
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B7/00—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements
    • G02B7/02—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses
    • G02B7/04—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses with mechanism for focusing or varying magnification
    • G02B7/09—Mountings, adjusting means, or light-tight connections, for optical elements for lenses with mechanism for focusing or varying magnification adapted for automatic focusing or varying magnification
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B13/00—Viewfinders; Focusing aids for cameras; Means for focusing for cameras; Autofocus systems for cameras
    • G03B13/32—Means for focusing
    • G03B13/34—Power focusing
    • G03B13/36—Autofocus systems
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B5/00—Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B5/00—Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • G03B5/02—Lateral adjustment of lens
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B5/00—Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • G03B5/04—Vertical adjustment of lens; Rising fronts
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H02—GENERATION; CONVERSION OR DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER
    • H02K—DYNAMO-ELECTRIC MACHINES
    • H02K41/00—Propulsion systems in which a rigid body is moved along a path due to dynamo-electric interaction between the body and a magnetic field travelling along the path
    • H02K41/02—Linear motors; Sectional motors
    • H02K41/035—DC motors; Unipolar motors
    • H02K41/0352—Unipolar motors
    • H02K41/0354—Lorentz force motors, e.g. voice coil motors
    • H02K41/0356—Lorentz force motors, e.g. voice coil motors moving along a straight path
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
    • H04N23/68—Control of cameras or camera modules for stable pick-up of the scene, e.g. compensating for camera body vibrations
    • H04N23/682—Vibration or motion blur correction
    • H04N23/685—Vibration or motion blur correction performed by mechanical compensation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N23/00—Cameras or camera modules comprising electronic image sensors; Control thereof
    • H04N23/60—Control of cameras or camera modules
    • H04N23/68—Control of cameras or camera modules for stable pick-up of the scene, e.g. compensating for camera body vibrations
    • H04N23/682—Vibration or motion blur correction
    • H04N23/685—Vibration or motion blur correction performed by mechanical compensation
    • H04N23/687—Vibration or motion blur correction performed by mechanical compensation by shifting the lens or sensor position
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B2205/00—Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • G03B2205/0007—Movement of one or more optical elements for control of motion blur
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B2205/00—Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • G03B2205/0007—Movement of one or more optical elements for control of motion blur
    • G03B2205/0015—Movement of one or more optical elements for control of motion blur by displacing one or more optical elements normal to the optical axis
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B2205/00—Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • G03B2205/0007—Movement of one or more optical elements for control of motion blur
    • G03B2205/0023—Movement of one or more optical elements for control of motion blur by tilting or inclining one or more optical elements with respect to the optical axis
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B2205/00—Adjustment of optical system relative to image or object surface other than for focusing
    • G03B2205/0053—Driving means for the movement of one or more optical element
    • G03B2205/0069—Driving means for the movement of one or more optical element using electromagnetic actuators, e.g. voice coils
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
    • G03B30/00—Camera modules comprising integrated lens units and imaging units, specially adapted for being embedded in other devices, e.g. mobile phones or vehicles

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of camera technology, and in particular to a motor, a camera module and an electronic device.
  • optical image stabilization As smartphone cameras become more powerful, optical image stabilization (OIS) technology has gradually become one of the main selling points and competitiveness of mobile phone cameras.
  • the function of optical image stabilization technology is to detect and feedback the mobile phone shake within a certain frequency and amplitude range in real time when taking pictures and perform reverse compensation. Since this compensation is usually obtained by correcting the optical path through the optical lens, the loss of image quality is very small compared to using software algorithms to increase gain, thus ensuring the image quality well.
  • the current optical image stabilization technology is mainly implemented through voice coil motors (VCM).
  • VCM voice coil motors
  • the purpose of the embodiments of the present application is to provide a motor, a camera module and an electronic device, wherein the motor can realize a long-stroke design for optical image stabilization to obtain a better shooting experience.
  • the present application provides a motor, including a base, an anti-shake bracket, a first anti-shake magnetic component, a second anti-shake magnetic component, a first anti-shake coil and a second anti-shake coil
  • the anti-shake bracket includes a first corner, a first side, a second corner, a second side and a third corner connected in sequence, the first side and the second side are arranged at an angle, the first anti-shake magnetic component is fixed to the first side, and the second anti-shake magnetic component is fixed to the second side.
  • the anti-shake bracket is movably connected to the base, the first anti-shake coil and the second anti-shake coil are both fixed to the base, the first anti-shake coil is arranged facing the first anti-shake magnetic component, and is used to drive the anti-shake bracket to move relative to the base along a first direction, and the second anti-shake coil is arranged facing the second anti-shake magnetic component, and is used to drive the anti-shake bracket to move relative to the base along a second direction, and the second direction intersects with the first direction.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component and the first anti-shake coil are arranged in a third direction, and the second anti-shake magnetic component and the second anti-shake coil are arranged in the third direction, and the third direction is perpendicular to the first direction and the second direction.
  • the motor also includes a guide bracket, which is L-shaped.
  • the guide bracket includes three support parts that are arranged at intervals.
  • the three support parts are all located between the anti-shake bracket and the base, and are arranged one by one corresponding to the first corner, the second corner and the third corner.
  • the three support parts are connected to the base through multiple first support members, and are connected to the anti-shake bracket through multiple second support members, so that the relative movement direction of the anti-shake bracket and the guide bracket is different from the relative movement direction of the guide bracket and the base.
  • the anti-shake bracket under the drive of the first anti-shake magnetic part, the first anti-shake coil, the second anti-shake magnetic part and the second anti-shake coil, the anti-shake bracket can drive the focus bracket and the lens to move relative to the base in the first direction and/or the second direction, thereby realizing the movement of the plane perpendicular to the optical axis.
  • the motor can realize the optical image stabilization of the camera module.
  • the above magnetic gap is not affected by the movement of the anti-shake bracket, so the problem of rapid decrease of driving force caused by the increase of magnetic gap can be avoided, thereby ensuring that the anti-shake driving force of the motor is large and the driving force is relatively stable, which is conducive to the large stroke design of the optical image stabilization function of the motor to obtain a better shooting experience.
  • the coils and magnetic parts of the motor's anti-shake drive mechanism are roughly arranged in a plane perpendicular to the optical axis.
  • the width of the magnetic parts that is, the size of the first anti-shake magnetic part in the first direction and the size of the second anti-shake magnetic part in the second direction
  • the movement stroke of the anti-shake bracket in the first direction and/or the second direction can be increased, which is conducive to realizing a long-stroke design of optical image stabilization without increasing the height of the motor.
  • the movement resistance of the motor during the optical image stabilization process is mainly the sliding friction between the support and the matching structural parts, which is unrelated to the movement stroke, the resistance will not increase significantly when performing long-stroke optical image stabilization, thereby realizing a long-stroke design of optical image stabilization without significantly increasing the driving force.
  • the guide bracket adopts an L-shape, which is significantly smaller in volume than the frame-shaped structure, and can save space on both sides, thus facilitating The motor and the camera module are miniaturized.
  • the guide bracket can ensure the connection reliability of the anti-shake bracket and the base while reducing the volume, and can achieve the functions of stable support and accurate guidance, ensure the stability of the relative positions of the first anti-shake magnetic part and the first anti-shake coil and the relative positions of the second anti-shake magnetic part and the second anti-shake coil, so that the optical anti-shake movement of the motor is smooth and reliable.
  • the motor adopts a double-layer bracket design of a guide bracket and an anti-shake bracket.
  • Each layer of the bracket cooperates with the support member and the adjacent structural member to form a guide in one direction.
  • the guides in the two directions will not cause crosstalk, which is conducive to the precise guidance of optical image stabilization.
  • the guide bracket and the anti-shake bracket can move together relative to the base in the second direction, and based on the guiding effect of the multiple second support members, the anti-shake bracket can move relative to the guide bracket in the first direction. Therefore, the motor can achieve precise guidance during the optical image stabilization process through the matching structure of the base, the first support member, the guide bracket, the second support member and the anti-shake bracket, thereby solving the problem of excessive lens tilt when the traditional motor performs optical image stabilization.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component may have two opposite polarity directions, and the polarity direction of the first anti-shake magnetic component is arranged perpendicular to the winding plane of the first anti-shake coil.
  • the coils of the two sections of the first anti-shake coil may be arranged corresponding to the two polarity directions of the first anti-shake magnetic component, respectively, and the currents in the coils of the two sections flow in opposite directions.
  • the side of the first anti-shake magnetic component facing the first anti-shake coil includes a north pole (N) and a south pole (S), and the side of the first anti-shake magnetic component facing away from the focus coil includes a south pole (S) and a north pole (N) correspondingly.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component may have two opposite polarity directions, and the polarity direction of the second anti-shake magnetic component is arranged perpendicular to the winding plane of the second anti-shake coil.
  • the coils of the two sections of the second anti-shake coil can be respectively arranged corresponding to the two polarity directions of the second anti-shake magnetic component, and the currents in the coils of the two sections flow in opposite directions.
  • the side of the second anti-shake magnetic component facing the second anti-shake coil includes a north pole (N) and a south pole (S), and the side of the second anti-shake magnetic component facing away from the focus coil includes a south pole (S) and a north pole (N) correspondingly.
  • the anti-shake bracket further includes a third side and a fourth side, the third side is connected to the third corner and is disposed opposite to the first side, and the fourth side is connected to the first corner and is disposed opposite to the second side.
  • the motor further includes a focus bracket, a focus magnetic member, and a focus coil, the focus bracket is located on the inner side of the anti-shake bracket, the focus magnetic member is fixed to the focus bracket, the focus coil is fixed to the third side or the fourth side, and is disposed facing the focus magnetic member, and is used to drive the focus bracket to move relative to the anti-shake bracket along the third direction.
  • the anti-shake drive mechanism and the guide bracket are arranged on two sides of the motor corresponding to the first and second sides of the anti-shake bracket, the side corresponding to the third side of the anti-shake bracket is used to arrange the focus drive mechanism, and the side corresponding to the fourth side of the anti-shake bracket is not arranged with the drive mechanism. Therefore, the motor can make full use of its three sides to arrange the drive mechanism, and the remaining side can be minimized as much as possible, which is conducive to the overall miniaturization of the motor.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component, the second anti-shake magnetic component and the circuit board assembly are respectively fixed to the first side, the second side and the third side of the anti-shake bracket, and all adopt a matching structure that is at least partially embedded, so that the arrangement structure between the multiple components is compact and the space utilization rate is high.
  • the fourth side of the anti-shake bracket maintains a small size without other matching components. For example, the width of the fourth side is smaller than the width of the first side and the width of the second side, which is conducive to reducing the volume of the anti-shake bracket.
  • the movement direction of the focus bracket is perpendicular to the magnetic gap between the focus magnetic part and the focus coil.
  • the above magnetic gap is not affected by the movement of the focus bracket. Therefore, the problem of rapid decrease in driving force due to the increase in the magnetic gap can be avoided, thereby ensuring that the focus driving force of the motor is large and the driving force is relatively stable, which is conducive to the large stroke design of the motor's focus function.
  • the focus drive mechanism and the anti-shake drive mechanism of the motor are both of moving magnet design, and the drive of the motor in the first direction, the second direction and the third direction are all controlled separately by a group of drive parts (including coils and magnetic parts).
  • the focus bracket of the motor moves relative to the anti-shake bracket along the third direction and performs autofocus, the relative position of the anti-shake bracket and the base is not affected, and the magnetic gap width of the anti-shake drive mechanism does not change.
  • the anti-shake bracket moves relative to the base along the first direction and/or the second direction and performs optical image stabilization, the focus bracket moves with the anti-shake bracket, and the relative position of the two is not affected, and the magnetic gap width of the focus drive mechanism does not change. Therefore, the focus drive mechanism and the anti-shake drive mechanism of the motor are decoupled and do not interfere with each other during movement, which is conducive to ensuring the driving accuracy of the motor.
  • the focus bracket is located on the inner side of the anti-shake bracket, the focus coil is fixed to the anti-shake bracket, and the focus magnetic part is fixed to the focus bracket, the optical anti-shake movable subassembly of the motor wraps the focus movable subassembly.
  • the focus bracket is located on the inner side of the anti-shake bracket. It can be understood that when the focus bracket is located on the inner side of the anti-shake bracket, the anti-shake bracket can be arranged around the focus bracket. Surrounding can be that the anti-shake bracket is arranged around the focus bracket, or it can be that a part of the anti-shake bracket is arranged around the focus bracket. In this embodiment, the anti-shake bracket is frame-shaped. At this time, the anti-shake bracket is arranged around the focus bracket.
  • the plane around which the wire of the focus coil is wound (i.e., the winding plane) can be parallel to the third direction.
  • the focus coil is arranged vertically, so that the focus coil can occupy a smaller area in the plane perpendicular to the optical axis, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the motor.
  • the focus magnetic part can include two opposite polarity directions, both of which are perpendicular to the third direction. In this case, the focus magnetic part can be arranged vertically. Arrangement can reduce the space occupied by the focusing magnetic parts on the -plane, facilitating the miniaturization design of the motor.
  • the third side or the fourth side is provided with a through hole
  • the focus coil is at least partially located in the through hole
  • the motor further includes a focus circuit board
  • the focus coil is fixed to the anti-shake bracket via the focus circuit board.
  • the focus coil and the anti-shake bracket are arranged compactly, which is conducive to improving space utilization.
  • the distance between the central axis of the focus bracket and the outer side of the fourth side of the anti-shake bracket may be smaller than the distance between the central axis of the focus bracket and the outer side of the third side of the anti-shake bracket.
  • the anti-shake bracket reserves more space on the third side to facilitate the arrangement of the focus coil and the focus magnetic part, and reserves less space on the fourth side to reduce the volume, which is conducive to the miniaturization design of the motor.
  • the three support parts include a first support part, a second support part and a third support part
  • the guide bracket also includes a first connecting part and a second connecting part, the first connecting part connects the first support part and the second support part, and the second connecting part connects the second support part and the third support part.
  • the first side of the anti-shake bracket is set corresponding to the first connecting part of the guide bracket, and is arranged corresponding to one side of the base
  • the second side of the anti-shake bracket is set corresponding to the second connecting part of the guide bracket, and is arranged corresponding to the other side of the base. Therefore, the anti-shake bracket and the guide bracket are compactly arranged, and can make full use of the space of the three corner areas and two side areas of the base for arrangement, and the space of the other two side areas of the base is reduced, which is conducive to the miniaturized design of the motor.
  • the anti-shake bracket has an activity space, the first connection portion is located on the side of the first side and the first anti-shake magnetic component facing away from the activity space, and the second connection portion is located on the side of the second side and the second anti-shake magnetic component facing away from the activity space.
  • first connection portion and the second connection portion of the anti-shake bracket are arranged in an outer winding manner, and are staggered with the first side portion and the second side portion of the anti-shake bracket in the third direction, thereby facilitating reducing the height of the motor and achieving miniaturization.
  • the first connection portion includes a first body and a first reinforcement member embedded in the first body, and the strength of the first reinforcement member is greater than the strength of the first body.
  • the first body is plate-shaped, and the size of the first body in the third direction is greater than the size of the first body in the first direction; the first reinforcement member is plate-shaped, and the size of the first reinforcement member in the third direction is smaller than the size of the first reinforcement member in the first direction.
  • the first reinforcement member can increase the strength of the first connection portion, so that the relative position of the first support portion and the second support portion is more stable.
  • the laying plane of the first reinforcement member intersects with the vertical plane of the first body, or is even substantially perpendicular, so the first reinforcement member has a significant effect of improving the strength of the first connection portion.
  • the motor also includes an anti-shake magnetic component, which is fixed to the base and arranged facing the first anti-shake magnetic component and the second anti-shake magnetic component.
  • the magnetic force between the anti-shake magnetic component and the first anti-shake magnetic component and the second anti-shake magnetic component maintains contact between the base, the first support component, the guide bracket, the second support component and the anti-shake bracket.
  • the anti-shake bracket tends to approach the base through the magnetic force between the first anti-shake magnetic component and the first anti-shake magnetic component, and the magnetic force between the second anti-shake magnetic component and the second anti-shake magnetic component, thereby ensuring that the base, the second support component, the guide bracket, the first support component and the anti-shake bracket maintain contact and achieve pre-tightening.
  • the anti-shake magnetic component includes a first anti-shake magnetic component and a second anti-shake magnetic component.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component is arranged facing the first anti-shake magnetic component, and the center distance between the first anti-shake magnetic component and the first corner is smaller than the center distance between the first anti-shake magnetic component and the second corner;
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component is arranged facing the second anti-shake magnetic component, and the center distance between the second anti-shake magnetic component and the third corner is smaller than the center distance between the second anti-shake magnetic component and the second corner.
  • the magnetic force between the first anti-shake magnetic component and the first anti-shake magnetic component, and the magnetic force between the second anti-shake magnetic component and the second anti-shake magnetic component can better ensure the connection between the three support portions of the guide bracket through the support portion and the base and the anti-shake bracket, thereby improving the reliability of the optical anti-shake process of the motor.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component is arranged close to the first corner
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component is arranged close to the third corner, which can make the pre-tightening force between the three support portions of the guide bracket and the base and the anti-shake bracket more balanced and reliable.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component is disposed opposite to the first anti-shake magnetic component, and the size of the first anti-shake magnetic component in the first direction is larger than the size of the first anti-shake magnetic component in the first direction.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component protrudes relative to both sides of the first anti-shake magnetic component in the first direction, and during the optical image stabilization process of the motor, the first anti-shake magnetic component can still maintain a positive relationship or a nearly positive relationship with the first anti-shake magnetic component, thereby ensuring the stability of the magnetic attraction.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component is directly opposite to the second anti-shake magnetic component, and the size of the second anti-shake magnetic component in the second direction is larger than the size of the second anti-shake magnetic component in the second direction.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component protrudes relative to both sides of the second anti-shake magnetic component in the second direction, and during the optical image stabilization process of the motor, the second anti-shake magnetic component can still maintain a directly opposite relationship or a nearly directly opposite relationship with the second anti-shake magnetic component, thereby ensuring the stability of the magnetic attraction.
  • the base includes a bottom plate and a side frame, the side frame is connected to the periphery of the bottom plate, the first anti-shake coil, the second anti-shake coil and the anti-shake magnetic suction component are all fixed to the bottom plate, the anti-shake bracket is located on the inner side of the side frame, and the three support parts are located between the anti-shake bracket and the bottom plate.
  • the anti-shake bracket tends to approach the base plate under the magnetic force, it can ensure that the guide bracket, multiple first support members, the anti-shake bracket, multiple second support members and the base plate remain in contact, thereby achieving precise guidance during the movement of the anti-shake bracket relative to the base, thereby improving the reliability and accuracy of the optical image stabilization.
  • the motor further includes a plurality of first springs, the arrangement plane of the plurality of first springs is perpendicular to the third direction, and is located on the side of the anti-shake bracket facing away from the bottom plate, some of the first springs are connected to the first side and the side frame, and another part of the first springs are connected to the second side and the side frame.
  • the plurality of first springs can be arranged in a plane perpendicular to the optical axis.
  • the plurality of first springs can be arranged using the space above the first side and the second side of the anti-shake bracket to improve the space utilization of the motor.
  • the plurality of first springs are used to provide an elastic force to move the anti-shake bracket back to the equilibrium position when the anti-shake bracket moves relative to the base and leaves the equilibrium position.
  • the first springs can be made of conductive material to take into account the signal transmission function.
  • the base includes a bottom plate, a side frame and a top plate, the top plate and the bottom plate are arranged opposite to each other, the side frame is connected between the bottom plate and the top plate, the first anti-shake coil and the second anti-shake coil are fixed to the bottom plate, the anti-shake magnetic suction part is fixed to the top plate, the anti-shake bracket is located on the inner side of the side frame, and the three support parts are located between the anti-shake bracket and the top plate.
  • the anti-shake bracket since the anti-shake bracket has a tendency to approach the top plate under the magnetic force, it can ensure that the top plate, the plurality of first support members, the guide bracket, the plurality of second support members and the anti-shake are in contact with each other, thereby achieving precise guidance during the movement of the anti-shake bracket relative to the base, so as to improve the reliability and accuracy of the optical anti-shake.
  • the anti-shake bracket and the guide bracket move together relative to the base along the guiding direction of the first support member;
  • the guide bracket remains stationary relative to the base, and the anti-shake bracket moves relative to the guide bracket and the base along the guiding direction of the second support member.
  • the motor further includes a plurality of first reeds, the arrangement plane of the plurality of first reeds is parallel to the third direction, and is located on a side of the anti-shake bracket that is not facing the first side portion or the second side portion, and the plurality of first reeds connect the anti-shake bracket and the bottom plate.
  • the plurality of first reeds are compactly arranged with the base and the anti-shake bracket, which is conducive to reducing the height of the motor and realizing miniaturization of the motor.
  • the top plate may be L-shaped.
  • the top plate may include three corner areas spaced apart from each other and two side areas connecting the three corner areas, and the two side areas are arranged at an angle.
  • the top plate is arranged corresponding to the guide bracket.
  • the three corner areas of the top plate are arranged corresponding to the three supporting parts of the guide bracket, and the two side areas of the top plate are arranged corresponding to the two connecting parts of the guide bracket.
  • the top plate has a small volume when cooperating with other structures to achieve the guiding effect, which is conducive to the miniaturized design of the motor.
  • the top plate may also be frame-shaped.
  • the anti-shake magnetic suction component is located on the side of the top plate facing away from the guide bracket, and the anti-shake magnetic suction component is an integrated structural component.
  • the number of anti-shake magnetic suction components is small, and the assembly is convenient.
  • the area of the anti-shake magnetic suction component is large, which can ensure the size and stability of the magnetic force between the anti-shake magnetic suction component and the first anti-shake magnetic component and the second anti-shake magnetic component, so as to improve the reliability of the optical anti-shake of the motor.
  • the first anti-shake coil includes a first sub-coil and a second sub-coil
  • the base includes a bottom plate, a side frame and a top plate, the top plate and the bottom plate are arranged opposite to each other, the side frame is connected between the bottom plate and the top plate, the anti-shake bracket is located on the inner side of the side frame, the first sub-coil is fixed to the bottom plate and arranged facing the first anti-shake magnetic component, and the second sub-coil is fixed to the top plate and arranged facing the first anti-shake magnetic component.
  • the anti-shake driving mechanism of the motor adopts a dual-coil driving scheme, which can provide greater driving force, which is conducive to improving driving efficiency and increasing the optical anti-shake stroke.
  • the first sub-coil and the second sub-coil are respectively located on opposite sides of the first anti-shake magnetic component, the accompanying forces of the driving forces of the first sub-coil and the second sub-coil can offset each other, thereby achieving a more accurate driving action.
  • the first sub-coil, the first anti-shake magnetic component, and the second sub-coil are aligned in the third direction. That is, the center of the first sub-coil, the center of the first anti-shake magnetic component, and the center of the second sub-coil are aligned or almost aligned in the third direction.
  • the driving force between the first sub-coil and the second sub-coil and the first anti-shake magnetic component is large, and the arrangement space of the first sub-coil, the first anti-shake magnetic component, and the second sub-coil on the - plane is small, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the motor.
  • the first sub-coil in the first direction, is biased toward one side relative to the first anti-shake magnetic component, and the second sub-coil is biased toward the other side relative to the second anti-shake magnetic component.
  • the first sub-coil, the second anti-shake magnetic component and the second sub-coil are roughly arranged in the third direction, but the center of the first sub-coil, the center of the first anti-shake magnetic component and the center of the second sub-coil are in a non-aligned position relationship in the third direction.
  • the first sub-coil and the second sub-coil can be offset on both sides of the first anti-shake magnetic component in the first direction, so as to achieve the purpose of balanced magnetic force.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component includes a first sub-magnetic component and a second sub-magnetic component arranged in a third direction, the polarity directions of the first sub-magnetic component and the second sub-magnetic component are arranged consistently, and both have two opposite polarity directions; or, the first anti-shake magnetic component is composed of a first magnet and a second magnet, the first magnet and the second magnet are arranged in a first direction, and the polarity direction of the first magnet is opposite to that of the second magnet; or, the first anti-shake magnetic component is a Halbach magnet array; or, the first anti-shake magnetic component is composed of a magnet, and the magnet includes two parts with opposite polarity directions.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component includes a first sub-magnetic component and a second sub-magnetic component
  • the motor further includes a first anti-shake guide component.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic conductive component includes a first part and a second part connected to the first part, the first part is embedded in the first edge, the second part is exposed relative to the anti-shake bracket, the first sub-magnetic component is fixed to one side surface of the second part, the second sub-magnetic component is fixed to the other side surface of the second part, and the first sub-magnetic component, the first anti-shake magnetic conductive component and the second sub-magnetic component are arranged in a third direction.
  • the assembly structure of the first anti-shake magnetic component and the first anti-shake magnetic conductive component is simple, easy to implement, and low in cost.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a camera module, including a lens, an image sensor, and a motor of any one of the above items, wherein the lens is mounted on the motor, and the image sensor is located on the light-emitting side of the lens.
  • the motor of the camera module can achieve long-stroke anti-shake, and the camera module has a high imaging quality to improve the shooting experience.
  • the camera module further includes a variable aperture, which is located on the light-incoming side of the lens.
  • the variable aperture has an aperture hole, and the size of the aperture hole can be automatically adjusted. Light can enter the lens through the aperture hole of the variable aperture.
  • the variable aperture is used to adjust the amount of incoming light, so that the camera module can maintain a constant shooting quality under various brightness conditions.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides an electronic device, comprising a device housing and any one of the above-mentioned camera modules, wherein the camera module is arranged in the device housing.
  • the electronic device has a better shooting experience.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an electronic device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a partial cross-sectional structure of the electronic device shown in FIG1 taken along line A-A in some embodiments;
  • FIG3 is a schematic structural diagram of some embodiments of the camera module shown in FIG1 ;
  • FIG4 is a partially exploded schematic diagram of some embodiments of the camera module shown in FIG3 ;
  • FIG5 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the motor shown in FIG4 in some embodiments.
  • FIG6 is a schematic structural diagram of the base shown in FIG5 in some embodiments.
  • FIG7 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the motor shown in FIG4 ;
  • FIG8 is a schematic structural diagram of the guide bracket shown in FIG5;
  • FIG9 is a schematic structural diagram of the guide bracket shown in FIG8 at another angle
  • FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the guide bracket shown in FIG9;
  • FIG11 is a second schematic diagram of a partial structure of the motor shown in FIG4 ;
  • FIG12 is a schematic structural diagram of the anti-shake bracket shown in FIG5 ;
  • FIG13 is a schematic structural diagram of the anti-shake bracket shown in FIG12 at another angle
  • FIG14 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the circuit board assembly shown in FIG5;
  • FIG15 is a third schematic diagram of a partial structure of the motor shown in FIG4 ;
  • FIG16 is a fourth schematic diagram of a partial structure of the motor shown in FIG4 ;
  • FIG17 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the focus bracket shown in FIG5;
  • FIG18 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the motor shown in FIG4 ;
  • FIG19 is a sixth schematic diagram of a partial structure of the motor shown in FIG4 ;
  • FIG20 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the motor shown in FIG4 ;
  • FIG21 is a schematic structural diagram of the motor shown in FIG4 at another angle
  • Fig. 22 is a schematic diagram of the cross-sectional structure of the motor shown in Fig. 21 taken along the line B-B;
  • FIG23 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the structure shown in FIG22;
  • FIG24 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the first anti-shake magnetic component shown in FIG22 in some embodiments.
  • FIG25 is a schematic diagram of a cross-sectional structure of the motor shown in FIG21 taken along C-C;
  • Fig. 26 is a schematic diagram of the cross-sectional structure of the motor shown in Fig. 21 taken along D-D;
  • FIG27 is a schematic diagram of a cross-sectional structure of the motor shown in FIG21 taken along line E-E;
  • FIG28 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the motor shown in FIG4 in some other embodiments.
  • FIG29 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the structure shown in FIG28;
  • FIG30 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the motor shown in FIG4 in other embodiments.
  • FIG31 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the structure shown in FIG30;
  • FIG32 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the top plate shown in FIG31 at another angle;
  • FIG33 is a schematic structural diagram of the anti-shake bracket shown in FIG31 at another angle
  • FIG34 is a schematic diagram of a cross-sectional structure of the structure shown in FIG30 taken along F-F;
  • FIG35 is a schematic diagram of a cross-sectional structure of the structure shown in FIG30 taken along G-G;
  • FIG36 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the motor shown in FIG4 in some other embodiments.
  • FIG37 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the structure shown in FIG36;
  • FIG38 is a schematic structural diagram of the structure shown in FIG37 at another angle
  • FIG39 is a schematic diagram of a cross-sectional structure of the structure shown in FIG36 taken along the line H-H;
  • FIG40 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the structure shown in FIG39 in other embodiments.
  • FIG41 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the structure shown in FIG39 in other embodiments.
  • FIG42 is an exploded schematic diagram of a portion of the structure of the motor shown in FIG4 ;
  • FIG43 is a schematic structural diagram of a portion of the structure shown in FIG42 at another angle
  • FIG44 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a part of the motor shown in FIG5 in other embodiments.
  • FIG45 is a simplified schematic diagram of the forces acting on the focus magnetic member shown in FIG44 , the focus magnetic member shown in FIG5 , and the focus bracket when moving in the positive direction along the third direction;
  • FIG46 is a simplified schematic diagram of the forces acting on the focus magnetic member shown in FIG44 , the focus magnetic member shown in FIG5 , and the focus bracket when moving in the negative direction along the third direction;
  • FIG47 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module shown in FIG3 at line I-I;
  • FIG48 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of the base shown in FIG5 at different angles;
  • FIG49 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of a line electrically connecting the focus driving chip shown in FIG5 to an external structure;
  • FIG50 is a partial structural schematic diagram of an embodiment of the motor shown in FIG4 ;
  • FIG51 is a partial structural schematic diagram of an embodiment of the motor shown in FIG4 ;
  • FIG52 is a schematic structural diagram of another embodiment of a circuit in which the focus driving chip shown in FIG5 is electrically connected to an external structure;
  • FIG53 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the electrical connection relationship between the motor controller, the focus driving chip, and the variable aperture driving chip shown in FIG4;
  • FIG54 is a partially exploded schematic diagram of the camera module shown in FIG3 in another embodiment
  • FIG55 is a partially exploded schematic diagram of the motor shown in FIG54 in one embodiment
  • FIG56 is a schematic diagram of the partial structure of the camera module shown in FIG3 in another embodiment.
  • connection can be detachably connected or non-detachably connected; it can be directly connected or indirectly connected through an intermediate medium.
  • fixed connection means that the relative position relationship after connection remains unchanged.
  • Rotational connection means that the connection is made and can rotate relative to each other after connection.
  • Slide relative connection means that the connection is made and can slide relative to each other after connection.
  • first”, “second”, “third”, and “fourth” are used for descriptive purposes only, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the number of technical features indicated. Therefore, features defined as “first”, “second”, “third”, and “fourth” may explicitly or implicitly include one or more of these features.
  • a and B are parallel, which means that A and B are parallel or approximately parallel, and the angle between A and B can be between 0 and 10 degrees.
  • a and B are perpendicular, which means that A and B are perpendicular or approximately perpendicular, and the angle between A and B can be between 80 and 100 degrees.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the structure of an electronic device 1000 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 1000 may be a mobile phone, a tablet personal computer, a laptop computer, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a camera, a personal computer, a notebook computer, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, an augmented reality (AR) glasses, an AR helmet, a virtual reality (VR) headset, or a wearable device.
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • AR augmented reality
  • VR virtual reality
  • the electronic device 1000 of the embodiment shown in FIG1 is described by taking a mobile phone as an example.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a partial cross-sectional structure of the electronic device 1000 shown in FIG. 1 taken along A-A in some embodiments.
  • the electronic device 1000 may include a camera module 100, a device housing 200, and a screen 300.
  • the camera module 100 may be a rear camera module or a front camera module.
  • FIG. 1 and the related drawings below only schematically illustrate some components included in the electronic device 1000, and the actual shape, actual size, actual position, and actual structure of these components are not limited by FIG. 1 and the drawings below.
  • the electronic device 1000 when the electronic device 1000 is a device of some other form, the electronic device 1000 may also not include the screen 300.
  • the device housing 200 may include a frame 201 and a back cover 202.
  • the back cover 202 is fixed to the frame 201.
  • the back cover 202 may be fixedly connected to the frame 201 by means of gluing, snapping, etc.
  • the back cover 202 may also be an integrally formed structure with the frame 201, that is, the back cover 202 and the frame 201 are an integral structure.
  • the screen 300 may be located on a side of the frame 201 away from the back cover 202. In this case, the screen 300 and the back cover 202 may be located on both sides of the frame 201, respectively.
  • the screen 300, the frame 201, and the back cover 202 together enclose the interior of the electronic device 1000.
  • the interior of the electronic device 1000 may be used to place components of the electronic device 1000, such as a battery, a receiver, or a microphone.
  • the screen 300 may be a flat screen or a curved screen.
  • the camera module 100 may be located inside the electronic device 1000.
  • the camera module 100 may be located on the side of the screen 300 facing the back cover 202.
  • the back cover 202 may be provided with a light-transmitting hole 203.
  • the shape of the light-transmitting hole 203 is not limited to the circular shape shown in FIG. 1.
  • the light-transmitting hole 203 connects the inside of the electronic device 1000 to the outside of the electronic device 1000. Light outside the electronic device 1000 may enter the inside of the electronic device 1000 through the light-transmitting hole 203.
  • the camera module 100 may collect light entering the inside of the electronic device 1000.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the structure of some embodiments of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 1
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a partial decomposition of some embodiments of the camera module 100 shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the camera module 100 may include a motor 1, a lens 2, a variable aperture 3, a module circuit board 4, an image sensor 5, a filter holder 6 and a filter 7. It is understandable that the image sensor 5 is also called a photosensitive chip or a photosensitive element. The image sensor 5 is used to collect ambient light and convert the image information carried by the ambient light into an electrical signal. In the following text, for the convenience of description, the camera module 100 is defined to have a first direction X, a second direction Y and a third direction Z.
  • the first direction X can be the width direction of the camera module 100
  • the second direction Y can be the length direction of the camera module 100
  • the second direction Y is perpendicular to the first direction X
  • the third direction Z can be the height direction of the camera module 100
  • the third direction Z is perpendicular to the first direction X and the second direction Y.
  • the coordinate system setting of the camera module 100 can be flexibly set according to specific actual needs.
  • the lens 2 may be mounted on the motor 1.
  • the optical axis direction of the lens 2 is parallel to the third direction Z of the camera module 100.
  • the optical axis direction of the lens 2 is the same as the optical axis direction of the camera module 100.
  • the motor 1 can realize auto focus (AF) by controlling the movement of the lens 2 along the third direction Z.
  • the motor 1 can also control the movement of the lens 2 along a plane perpendicular to the third direction Z (that is, the X-Y plane).
  • the movement of the lens 2 in the X-Y plane can be controlled by the motor 1 to offset the jitter stroke of the lens 2 in the X-Y plane, so as to avoid or reduce the position offset of the lens 2 caused by the jitter.
  • the camera module 100 of the present application can control the movement of the lens 2 in the X-Y plane by the motor 1 to realize the optical image stabilization (OIS) of the camera module 100 and improve the imaging quality of the camera module 100.
  • OF optical image stabilization
  • variable aperture 3 may be located on the light incident side of the lens 2.
  • the variable aperture 3 has an aperture hole 3a, and the size of the aperture hole 3a may be automatically adjusted.
  • Light may enter the lens 2 through the aperture hole 3a of the variable aperture 3.
  • the variable aperture 3 is used to adjust the amount of light entering, so that the camera module 100 can maintain a constant shooting quality under various brightness conditions.
  • the image sensor 5 can be fixed to the module circuit board 4 and electrically connected to the module circuit board 4. At this time, the image sensor 5 and the module circuit board 4 can transmit signals to each other.
  • the filter holder 6 is fixedly connected to the module circuit board 4.
  • the filter holder 6 and the image sensor 5 are located on the same side of the module circuit board 4.
  • the filter holder 6 is provided with a light-transmitting hole 6a.
  • the filter 7 is fixedly connected to the filter holder 6.
  • the filter 7 can be located in the light-transmitting hole 6a.
  • the filter 7 is also arranged opposite to the image sensor 5.
  • the filter 7 can be used to filter infrared light or blue light in the light before entering the image sensor 5, so as to ensure that the image sensor 5 has better imaging quality.
  • the motor 1 is fixed on the module circuit board 4 and is located on the same side of the module circuit board 4 as the image sensor 5.
  • the image sensor 5, the filter 7, the lens 2, and the variable aperture 3 are arranged in sequence.
  • the image sensor 5 is located on the light exit side of the lens 2.
  • the filter 7 is located between the lens 2 and the image sensor 5.
  • the present embodiment fixes the motor 1 on the module circuit.
  • the motor 1 and the filter holder 6 can be prevented from being stacked in the third direction Z, that is, the motor 1 and the filter holder 6 can be staggered in the XY plane, thereby greatly reducing the height of the camera module 100.
  • the motor 1 has an avoidance hole 1a.
  • a portion of the filter holder 6 can pass through the avoidance hole 1a and enter the interior of the drive motor 1. At this time, a portion of the filter holder 6 is located inside the drive motor 1. In this way, in the third direction Z, the filter holder 6 and the drive motor 1 have an overlapping area, so that the height of the camera module 100 can be reduced to a large extent.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the motor 1 shown in FIG. 4 in some embodiments.
  • the motor 1 includes an anti-shake driving module 10 and a focus driving module 20.
  • the anti-shake driving module 10 drives the lens 2 to perform optical image shaking
  • the focus driving module 20 drives the lens 2 to perform autofocus.
  • the anti-shake driving module 10 and the focus driving module 20 form an integrated motor. In this way, compared with a split motor in which the anti-shake driving module 10 and the focus driving module 20 are separately arranged, the motor 1 of this embodiment is smaller in size, which is conducive to realizing the miniaturization of the motor 1, thereby helping to save the internal space of the electronic device 1000.
  • the anti-shake driving module 10 may include a base 11, an anti-shake bracket 12, an anti-shake driving mechanism 13, a guide bracket 14, a first support member 151, a second support member 152, a first anti-shake magnetic member 161, a second anti-shake magnetic member 162, a first anti-shake sensor 171, and a second anti-shake sensor 172.
  • the anti-shake driving mechanism 13 includes a first anti-shake coil 131, a first anti-shake magnetic member 132, a second anti-shake coil 133, and a second anti-shake magnetic member 134.
  • the anti-shake driving mechanism 13 may also include a first anti-shake magnetic member 135 and a second anti-shake magnetic member 136.
  • the first anti-shake coil 131, the first anti-shake magnetic member 132, and the first anti-shake magnetic member 135 are correspondingly arranged to form a group of driving mechanisms
  • the second anti-shake coil 133, the second anti-shake magnetic member 134, and the second anti-shake magnetic member 136 are correspondingly arranged to form another group of driving mechanisms.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic member 161 and the second anti-shake magnetic member 162 are both part of the anti-shake magnetic member 16 of the motor 1.
  • the focus drive module 20 may include a focus bracket 21, a focus drive mechanism 22, a circuit board assembly 23, a focus magnetic attraction member 233 and a third support member 235.
  • the focus drive mechanism 22 may include a focus coil 221 and a focus magnetic member 222.
  • the focus drive mechanism 22 may also include a focus magnetic conductive member 223.
  • the circuit board assembly 23 includes a focus circuit board 231, a focus drive chip 232, a focus sensor 234 and a reinforcement member 236. In other embodiments, the circuit board assembly 23 may also not include the focus sensor 234 and/or the reinforcement member 236.
  • the number of the third support member 235 may be two.
  • the motor 1 may further include a plurality of first reeds 18 and a plurality of second reeds 19.
  • the number of the first reeds 18 may be four, or other numbers.
  • the number of the second reeds 19 may be four, or other numbers.
  • the motor 1 may further include a limit bracket 30 and a housing 40.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of the base 11 shown in FIG. 5 in some embodiments.
  • the base 11 may include a bottom plate 111 and a side frame 112, and the side frame 112 is connected to the periphery of the bottom plate 111.
  • the bottom plate 111 may be roughly frame-shaped, that is, a through hole is provided in the middle of the bottom plate 111.
  • the bottom plate 111 may include a first corner area 111a, a first side area 111b, a second corner area 111c, a second side area 111d, and a third corner area 111e connected in sequence, and the first side area 111b is arranged at an angle with the second side area 111d.
  • the bottom plate 111 may also include a third side area 111f and a fourth side area 111g, the third side area 111f is connected to the third corner area 111e and is arranged opposite to the first side area 111b, and the fourth side area 111g is connected to the first corner area 111a and is arranged opposite to the second side area 111d.
  • the width of the first side region 111 b and the width of the second side region 111 d are greater than the width of the third side region 111 f and the width of the fourth side region 111 g .
  • the bottom plate 111 may have an upper surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate 111 is arranged toward the side frame 112.
  • the bottom plate 111 may be provided with a plurality of first grooves 1111, for example, the number of the first grooves 1111 may be three, and the three first grooves 1111 may be respectively located in the first corner area 111a, the second corner area 111c and the third corner area 111e of the bottom plate 111.
  • the first groove 1111 may be recessed from the upper surface of the bottom plate 111 to the inside of the bottom plate 111, and the extension direction of the first groove 1111 is parallel to the second direction Y.
  • the bottom plate 111 may include a plurality of first block groups, and the plurality of first block groups are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of first grooves 1111.
  • Each first block group includes two first blocks 1112 protruding from the upper surface of the bottom plate 111, and the two first blocks 1112 are respectively located at the two ends of the corresponding first groove 1111.
  • the arrangement direction of the two first blocks 1112 may be parallel to the extension direction of the first groove 1111.
  • the bottom plate 111 may further include a plurality of first positioning posts 1113 and a plurality of second positioning posts 1114.
  • the plurality of first positioning posts 1113 are located in the first side region 111b of the bottom plate 111, and the plurality of first positioning posts 1113 may be arranged at intervals and protrude relative to the upper surface of the bottom plate 111.
  • the plurality of second positioning posts 1114 are located in the second side region 111d of the bottom plate 111, and the plurality of second positioning posts 1114 may be arranged at intervals and protrude relative to the upper surface of the bottom plate 111.
  • the base 11 may include an insulating body and a conductive member, wherein the conductive member is embedded in the insulating body and may form a plurality of transmission channels for realizing signal transmission.
  • the insulating body may form the main body of the bottom plate 111 and the side frame 112, and the conductive member may be arranged in the bottom plate 111 and the side frame 112.
  • part of the end of the conductive member may be exposed from the outer periphery of the bottom plate 111, and part of the end of the conductive member may be exposed from the bottom plate 111.
  • the upper surface of the side frame 112 is exposed, and part of the end of the conductive member can be exposed from the upper surface of the side frame 112.
  • the base 11 may include a first pad 11151 and a second pad 11152.
  • the first pad 11151 may be formed by a portion of the end of the conductive member, and the second pad 11152 may be formed by another portion of the end of the conductive member.
  • the first pad 11151 is located in the first side region 111b of the bottom plate 111 and is exposed relative to the upper surface of the bottom plate 111.
  • the first pad 11151 may be located between two adjacent first positioning posts 1113.
  • the second pad 11152 is located in the second side region 111d of the bottom plate 111 and is exposed relative to the upper surface of the bottom plate 111.
  • the second pad 11152 may be located between two adjacent second positioning posts 1114.
  • the bottom plate 111 may also be provided with a first recessed groove 1116 and a second recessed groove 1117, and the first recessed groove 1116 and the second recessed groove 1117 may both be exposed toward the upper surface of the bottom plate 111.
  • the first recessed groove 1116 is located in the first edge area 111b of the bottom plate 111, and the first recessed groove 1116 may be located between two adjacent first positioning columns 1113. Among them, compared with the second corner area 111c of the bottom plate 111, the first recessed groove 1116 is closer to the first corner area 111a of the bottom plate 111.
  • the center distance between the first recessed groove 1116 and the first corner area 111a is less than the center distance between the first recessed groove 1116 and the second corner area 111c.
  • the center distance between two structures refers to the distance between the centers of the two structures.
  • the second recessed groove 1117 is located in the second side area 111d of the bottom plate 111, and the second recessed groove 1117 can be located between two adjacent second positioning columns 1114. Compared with the second corner area 111c of the bottom plate 111, the second recessed groove 1117 is closer to the third corner area 111e of the bottom plate 111. The center distance between the second recessed groove 1117 and the third corner area 111e is smaller than the center distance between the second recessed groove 1117 and the second corner area 111c.
  • the side frame 112 may have a first avoidance space 1121 and a second avoidance space 1122 , wherein the first avoidance space 1121 is arranged corresponding to the first side area 111 b of the bottom plate 111 , and the second avoidance space 1122 is arranged corresponding to the second side area 111 d of the bottom plate 111 .
  • FIG. 7 is a partial structural schematic diagram 1 of the motor 1 shown in FIG. 4 .
  • a plurality of first support members 151 may be mounted in a one-to-one correspondence in a plurality of first grooves 1111. Part of the outer surface of the first support member 151 is raised relative to the upper surface of the bottom plate 111.
  • the first support member 151 is located between two corresponding first stoppers 1112, and the two first stoppers 1112 are used to limit the first support member 151 so that the relative position between the first support member 151 and the base 11 is more stable to prevent the first support member 151 from falling out.
  • the first support member 151 may also be fixedly connected to the base 11 by dispensing glue or welding.
  • the first support member 151 may adopt a sliding shaft structure, such as a cylindrical structure.
  • the first support member 151 may also adopt a ball structure.
  • the first support member 151 may include a plurality of balls.
  • the arrangement direction of the plurality of balls is parallel to the extension direction of the first groove 1111.
  • the plurality of first support members 151 may all adopt a sliding shaft structure, or all adopt a ball structure, or adopt a combination structure of a sliding shaft and a ball, and the embodiments of the present application do not strictly limit this.
  • the plurality of first support members 151 may include at least one of a sliding shaft or a ball.
  • the plurality of first support members 151 may also form an integrally formed structural member together with the base 11 , which will not be described in detail here.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 can be installed in the first recessed groove 1116 to be fixed to the base 11.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 can be bonded to the bottom groove wall of the first recessed groove 1116.
  • the size of the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 in the first direction X can be greater than its size in the second direction Y.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 can be roughly rectangular, the long side of the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 can be parallel to or approximately parallel to the first direction X, and the short side of the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 can be parallel to or approximately parallel to the second direction Y.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 can be made of a material that can generate magnetic attraction with a magnet or other magnetic components, such as a ferromagnetic material.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 can be installed in the second recessed groove 1117 to be fixed to the base 11.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 can be bonded to the bottom groove wall of the second recessed groove 1117.
  • the size of the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 in the second direction Y can be greater than its size in the first direction X.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 can be roughly rectangular, the long side of the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 can be parallel to or approximately parallel to the second direction Y, and the short side of the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 can be parallel to or approximately parallel to the first direction X.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 can be made of a material that can generate magnetic attraction with a magnet or other magnetic components, such as a ferromagnetic material.
  • the size of the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 in the first direction X may also be less than or equal to the size in the second direction Y, and the size of the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 in the second direction Y may also be less than or equal to the size in the first direction X.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 and the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 may also have other shapes, which are not strictly limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the first anti-shake coil 131 is installed in the first side area 111b of the bottom plate 111 to be fixed to the base 11.
  • the first anti-shake coil 131 can be arranged around multiple first positioning columns 1113, and the multiple first positioning columns 1113 are used to limit the first anti-shake coil 131.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic suction component 161 is located on the side of the first anti-shake coil 131 close to the bottom plate 111.
  • the second anti-shake coil 133 is installed in the second side area 111d of the bottom plate 111 to be fixed to the base 11.
  • the second anti-shake coil 133 can be arranged around multiple second positioning columns 1114, and the multiple second positioning columns 1114 are used to limit the second anti-shake coil 133.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic suction component 162 is located on the side of the second anti-shake coil 133 close to the bottom plate 111.
  • the first anti-shake sensor 171 is fixed to the first edge region 111b of the bottom plate 111 and is located inside the first anti-shake coil 131.
  • the first anti-shake sensor 171 can be welded to the first pad 11151 to achieve structural fixation and electrical connection.
  • the first anti-shake sensor 171 is used to achieve position detection, and the first anti-shake sensor 171 can be a hall sensor or a tunnel magnetoresistance (TMR) sensor.
  • TMR tunnel magnetoresistance
  • the second anti-shake sensor 172 is fixed to the second edge area 111d of the bottom plate 111 and is located on the inner side of the second anti-shake coil 133.
  • the second anti-shake sensor 172 can be welded to the second pad 11152 to achieve structural fixation and electrical connection.
  • the second anti-shake sensor 172 is used to achieve position detection, and the second anti-shake sensor 172 can use a Hall sensor or a tunnel magnetoresistance (TMR) sensor.
  • TMR tunnel magnetoresistance
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of the guide bracket 14 shown in FIG. 5
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of the guide bracket 14 shown in FIG. 8 at another angle.
  • the guide bracket 14 may be substantially L-shaped.
  • the guide bracket 14 includes three support portions (141, 143, 145) arranged at intervals and two connecting portions (142, 144) connecting the three support portions (141, 143, 145).
  • the guide bracket 14 may include a first support portion 141, a first connecting portion 142, a second support portion 143, a second connecting portion 144 and a third support portion 145.
  • the first support portion 141, the second support portion 143 and the third support portion 145 are arranged at intervals in pairs, the first connecting portion 142 connects the first support portion 141 and the second support portion 143, and the second connecting portion 144 connects the second support portion 143 and the third support portion 145.
  • the first connecting portion 142 and the second connecting portion 144 may be arranged at an angle.
  • the first connecting portion 142 and the second connecting portion 144 may be arranged perpendicular to each other or substantially perpendicular to each other.
  • the guide bracket 14 may be provided with a plurality of second grooves 146.
  • the plurality of second grooves 146 are arranged toward the same side of the guide bracket 14.
  • the number of the second grooves 146 may be three, and the three second grooves 146 are respectively located at the first support portion 141, the second support portion 143, and the third support portion 145, and the extension direction of the second grooves 146 may be parallel to the first direction X.
  • the second groove 146 may be recessed from a side surface of the corresponding support portion to the inside of the support portion.
  • the guide bracket 14 may also include a plurality of second block groups, and the plurality of second block groups are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of second grooves 146.
  • Each second block group includes two protruding second blocks 147, and the two second blocks 147 are respectively located at the two ends of the corresponding second groove 146.
  • the arrangement direction of the two second blocks 147 may be parallel to the extension direction of the second groove 146.
  • the guide bracket 14 may also be provided with a plurality of first slide grooves 148, and the plurality of first slide grooves 148 are arranged facing away from the plurality of second grooves 146.
  • the number of the first slide grooves 148 may be three, and the three first slide grooves 148 are respectively located in the first support portion 141, the second support portion 143, and the third support portion 145, and the extension direction of the first slide groove 148 may be parallel to the second direction Y.
  • the first slide groove 148 may be recessed from the other side surface of the corresponding support portion to the inside of the support portion.
  • the first slide groove 148 may penetrate the corresponding support portion in its extension direction to form a through groove.
  • the first support portion 141 and the second support portion 143 may be located on one side of the first connection portion 142 in the first direction X, that is, the first connection portion 142 is arranged to avoid the space directly facing the first support portion 141 and the second support portion 143, and the first support portion 141, the first connection portion 142 and the second support portion 143 may be roughly "U" shaped.
  • the second support portion 143 and the third support portion 145 may be located on one side of the second connection portion 144 in the second direction Y, that is, the second connection portion 144 is arranged to avoid the space directly facing the second support portion 143 and the third support portion 145, and the second support portion 143, the second connection portion 144 and the third support portion 145 may be roughly "U" shaped.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the guide bracket 14 shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the guide bracket 14 includes a body and a reinforcement member embedded in the body, and the strength of the reinforcement member is greater than the strength of the body to increase the overall structural strength of the guide bracket 14.
  • the body can be made of plastic material
  • the reinforcement member can be made of metal material.
  • the first connection portion 142 includes a first body 142a and a first reinforcement member 142b embedded in the first body 142a, and the strength of the first reinforcement member 142b is greater than the strength of the first body 142a.
  • the first body 142a can be roughly plate-shaped, and the size of the first body 142a in the third direction Z is greater than the size of the first body 142a in the first direction X.
  • the first body 142a is roughly erected in the Y-Z plane.
  • the first reinforcement member 142b can be roughly plate-shaped, and the size of the first reinforcement member 142b in the third direction Z is smaller than the size of the first reinforcement member 142b in the first direction X.
  • the first reinforcement member 142b is roughly laid in the X-Y plane.
  • the first reinforcement member 142b can increase the strength of the first connection portion 142, so that the relative position of the first support portion 141 and the second support portion 143 is more stable.
  • the laying plane of the first reinforcement member 142 b intersects with, or is even substantially perpendicular to, the vertical plane of the first body 142 a , so the first reinforcement member 142 b has a significant effect of improving the strength of the first connection portion 142 .
  • the second connection portion 144 may include a second body 144a and a second reinforcement 144b embedded in the second body 144a.
  • the strength of the second reinforcement 144b is greater than the strength of the second body 144a.
  • the second body 144a may be roughly plate-shaped, and the size of the second body 144a in the third direction Z is greater than the size of the second body 144a in the second direction Y. At this time, the second body 144a is roughly vertically arranged in the XZ plane.
  • the second reinforcement 144b may be roughly plate-shaped, and the size of the second reinforcement 144b in the third direction Z is smaller than the size of the first reinforcement 142b in the second direction Y. size.
  • the first reinforcement member 142b is roughly laid on the XY plane.
  • the second reinforcement member 144b can increase the strength of the second connecting portion 144, so that the relative position of the second supporting portion 143 and the third supporting portion 145 is more stable.
  • the laying plane of the second reinforcement member 144b intersects with the vertical plane of the second body 144a, and is even roughly perpendicular to it, so the second reinforcement member 144b has a significant effect on improving the strength of the second connecting portion 144.
  • the reinforcement member may further include a third reinforcement member 141b, a fourth reinforcement member 143b and a fifth reinforcement member 145b, wherein the fourth reinforcement member 143b connects the first reinforcement member 142b and the second reinforcement member 144b, the fourth reinforcement member 143b may be located at the second support portion 143, the third reinforcement member 141b is connected to one end of the first reinforcement member 142b away from the second reinforcement member 144b, the third reinforcement member 141b may be located at the first support portion 141, the fifth reinforcement member 145b is connected to one end of the second reinforcement member 144b away from the second reinforcement member 144b, and the fifth reinforcement member 145b may be located at the third support portion 145.
  • the third reinforcement member 141b, the first reinforcement member 142b, the fourth reinforcement member 143b, the second reinforcement member 144b and the fifth reinforcement member 145b are connected in sequence, and the reinforcement member is an integrated structure.
  • the reinforcement member may be formed by bending or stamping an integrated metal member.
  • first reinforcement member 142b and the second reinforcement member 144b may not be connected, and the two are independent of each other.
  • the first reinforcement member 142b may be erected in the Y-Z plane, and the second reinforcement member 144b may be erected in the X-Z plane.
  • the specific structure of the reinforcement member is not strictly limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a second schematic diagram of a partial structure of the motor 1 shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the guide bracket 14 is installed on the base 11.
  • the first support portion 141 is arranged corresponding to the first corner area 111a of the bottom plate 111
  • the second support portion 143 is arranged corresponding to the second corner area 111c of the bottom plate 111
  • the third support portion 145 is arranged corresponding to the third corner area 111e of the bottom plate 111.
  • the three first slide grooves 148 of the guide bracket 14 are arranged one by one with the three first grooves 1111 of the base 11, and the first support member 151 installed in the first groove 1111 is partially embedded in the first slide groove 148.
  • the first support portion 141, the second support portion 143 and the third support portion 145 of the guide bracket 14 are connected to the base 11 through a plurality of first support members 151.
  • the guide bracket 14 is slidably connected to the base 11 through a plurality of first support members 151, and the relative sliding direction of the two is parallel to the guiding direction of the first support member 151.
  • the axial direction of the sliding shaft is the guiding direction of the first support member 151
  • the arrangement direction of the multiple balls is the guiding direction of the first support member 151.
  • the guide bracket 14 and the first support member 151 are in line contact when they move relative to each other, which can avoid the risk of pits caused by excessive impact pressure and improve reliability.
  • the width of the contact position between the first support member 151 and the guide bracket 14 can be increased to further improve the reliability of the structural matching.
  • the guide direction of the plurality of first support members 151 is parallel to the second direction Y, so the guide bracket 14 can slide relative to the base 11 along the second direction Y.
  • the first support member 151 can also limit other structural members in the direction perpendicular to the guide direction thereof.
  • the first support member 151 is provided so that the guide bracket 14 and the base 11 are mutually limited in the first direction X.
  • the first connection portion 142 is provided corresponding to the first side area 111b of the bottom plate 111, and the first connection portion 142 can be located on a side of the third side area 111f of the first anti-shake coil 131 away from the bottom plate 111.
  • the first connection portion 142 can be at least partially located in the first avoidance space 1121 of the side frame 112 of the base 11 to improve the space utilization of the motor 1.
  • the second connection portion 144 is provided corresponding to the second side area 111d of the bottom plate 111, and the second connection portion 144 can be located on a side of the fourth side area 111g of the second anti-shake coil 133 away from the bottom plate 111.
  • the second connection portion 144 can be at least partially located in the second avoidance space 1122 of the side frame 112 of the base 11 to improve the space utilization of the motor 1.
  • the cooperation between the first connection part 142 and the second connection part 144 and the side frame 112 can also take into account the needs of active avoidance and/or limiting.
  • the guide bracket 14 and the base 11 can slide relative to each other in the second direction Y, and a space is reserved between the first connection part 142 and the side frame 112 to allow the first connection part 142 to move, so as to achieve active avoidance.
  • the guide bracket 14 and the base 11 can limit each other in the first direction X, and the second connection part 144 can form a limiting structure together with the side frame 112, such as the cooperation structure between the second connection part 144 and the wall of the second avoidance space 1122.
  • the guide bracket 14 and the base 11 can also achieve limiting in the first direction X through other structures, and the embodiments of the present application are not strictly limited to this.
  • a plurality of second support members 152 can be installed in a one-to-one correspondence to a plurality of second grooves 146 of the guide bracket 14.
  • the three second support members 152 are respectively installed on the first support portion 141, the second support portion 143 and the third support portion 145 of the guide bracket 14.
  • part of the outer surface of the second support member 152 is raised relative to the surface of the corresponding support portion of the guide bracket 14.
  • the second support member 152 is located between the corresponding two second stoppers 147, and the two second stoppers 147 are used to limit the second support member 152 so that the relative position between the second support member 152 and the guide bracket 14 is more stable to prevent the second support member 152 from falling out.
  • the second support member 152 can also be fixedly connected to the guide bracket 14 by dispensing glue or welding.
  • the second support member 152 may adopt a sliding shaft structure, such as a cylindrical structure.
  • the second support member 152 may also adopt a ball structure.
  • the second support member 152 may include a plurality of balls.
  • the arrangement direction of the plurality of balls is parallel to the extension direction of the second groove 146.
  • the plurality of second support members 152 adopts a combination structure of a sliding shaft and a ball bearing, and the sliding shaft structure and the ball bearing structure can refer to the aforementioned structure, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the plurality of second support members 152 may include at least one of a sliding shaft or a ball bearing.
  • the plurality of second support members 152 may also form an integrally formed structural member together with the guide bracket 14 , which will not be described in detail here.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of the anti-shake bracket 12 shown in FIG. 5
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of the anti-shake bracket 12 shown in FIG. 12 at another angle.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 may be roughly frame-shaped.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 may include a first corner 12a, a first side 12b, a second corner 12c, a second side 12d, and a third corner 12e connected in sequence, and the first side 12b and the second side 12d are arranged at an angle.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 also includes a third side 12f and a fourth side 12g, the third side 12f is connected to the third corner 12e and is arranged opposite to the first side 12b, and the fourth side 12g is connected to the first corner 12a and is arranged opposite to the second side 12d.
  • the first side 12b and the second side 12d may be arranged perpendicular to each other, the third side 12f may be parallel to the first side 12b, and the fourth side 12g may be parallel to the second side 12d.
  • first side 12b and the second side 12d can be directly connected, or indirectly connected through the second corner 12c; the second corner 12c connects the first side 12b and/or the second side 12d; the second side 12d and the third side 12f can be directly connected, or indirectly connected through the third corner 12e; the third corner 12e connects the first side 12b and/or the second side 12d; the fourth side 12g and the first side 12b can be directly connected, or indirectly connected through the first corner 12a; the first corner 12a connects the first side 12b and/or the second side 12d; the third side 12f and the fourth side 12g can be directly connected, or connected through a corner.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not strictly limit the specific structure of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 may be provided with a plurality of second slide grooves 121, and the plurality of second slide grooves 121 are arranged toward the same side of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the number of the second slide grooves 121 may be three, and the three second slide grooves 121 are respectively located at the first corner 12a, the second corner 12c, and the third corner 12e, and the extension direction of the second slide groove 121 may be parallel to the first direction X.
  • the first side portion 12b is provided with a first mounting groove 122, and the first mounting groove 122 is located between the two second slide grooves 121; the second side portion 12d is provided with a second mounting groove 123, and the second mounting groove 123 is located between the two second slide grooves 121.
  • the second mounting groove 123 and the first mounting groove 122 are arranged toward the same side of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 has an activity space 124, and the activity space 124 is located between the first side portion 12b and the third side portion 12f, and between the second side portion 12d and the fourth side portion 12g. That is, the first side portion 12b, the second side portion 12d, the third side portion 12f and the fourth side portion 12g are arranged around the activity space 124.
  • the activity space 124 penetrates the anti-shake bracket 12 in the third direction Z.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 may also include a first stop block 125, and the first stop block 125 is located in the activity space 124 and fixedly connected to multiple sides of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the number of the first stop blocks 125 can be multiple, and the multiple first stop blocks 125 can be arranged at intervals on the peripheral side of the activity space 124.
  • the number of the first stop block 125 can also be one, and the embodiment of the present application does not strictly limit this.
  • the third side portion 12f of the anti-shake bracket 12 is provided with a through hole 126, which passes through the third side portion 12f in the first direction X, and the through hole 126 is connected to the activity space 124.
  • the third side portion 12f may also be provided with a third mounting groove 127 and a fourth mounting groove 128, which are arranged at intervals and are respectively located on both sides of the through hole 126.
  • the extension direction of the third mounting groove 127 and the fourth mounting groove 128 may be parallel to the third direction Z.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the assembly structure of the circuit board assembly 23 shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the focus driver chip 232 and the focus sensor 234 of the circuit board assembly 23 are both fixed on the focus circuit board 231 and are electrically connected to the focus circuit board 231.
  • the focus coil 221 is fixed on the focus circuit board 231 and is electrically connected to the focus circuit board 231. It can be understood that the input end and the output end of the focus coil 221 can form a current loop with the focus driver chip 232 through the focus circuit board 231.
  • the focus driver chip 232 can control the current of the focus coil 221 (for example, whether the current is on or the magnitude of the current when it is powered on) through the focus circuit board 231.
  • the focus coil 221 can be arranged around the focus driver chip 232 and the focus sensor 234. In this way, the focus driver chip 232 and the focus sensor 234 can effectively utilize the inner space of the focus coil 221, thereby greatly improving the space utilization of the motor 1.
  • the focusing magnetic member 233 is fixed to the side of the focusing circuit board 231 facing away from the focusing coil 221.
  • the focusing magnetic member 233 is made of a material that can generate magnetic attraction with a magnet or other magnetic components, such as a ferromagnetic material.
  • the reinforcement 236 is fixed to the side of the focusing circuit board 231 facing away from the focusing coil 221, and is used to increase the structural strength of the circuit board assembly 23 and reduce the risk of deformation of the focusing circuit board 231.
  • the reinforcement 236 and the focusing magnetic member 233 can be fixed to different areas of the focusing circuit board 231, and the focusing magnetic member 233 can also be used to increase the structural strength of the circuit board assembly 23 and reduce the risk of deformation of the focusing circuit board 231.
  • the reinforcement 236 can be spliced with the focusing magnetic member 233, or they can be spaced apart from each other.
  • the two can be integrally formed structural members, or an integral structure can be formed by assembly.
  • the reinforcing piece 236 is fixed to the side of the focusing circuit board 231 facing away from the focusing coil 221, and the reinforcing piece 236 has a larger area so as to provide overall reinforcement for the focusing circuit board 231.
  • the focusing magnetic member 233 is fixed to the side of the reinforcing piece 236 facing away from the focusing circuit board 231. At this time, the focusing magnetic member 233 and the reinforcing piece 236 are in a stacked state.
  • FIG. 15 is a third schematic diagram of a partial structure of the motor 1 shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 and the first anti-shake magnetic conductive component 135 can be installed in the first installation groove 122 of the first side 12b of the anti-shake bracket 12 to be fixed to the first side 12b.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 can be a magnet or other magnetic component
  • the first anti-shake magnetic conductive component 135 is made of magnetic conductive material, such as silicon steel sheets and alloys formed by various iron products and rare earth elements.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic conductive component 135 can be located between the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 and the bottom wall of the first installation groove 122.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic conductive component 135 can be fixed to the anti-shake bracket 12 by bonding or the like, and can also be formed into an integrally formed structural component with the anti-shake bracket 12 by insert-molding or the like.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 can be fixed to the first anti-shake magnetic conductive component 135 by bonding or the like.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 and the second anti-shake magnetic conductive component 136 can be installed in the second mounting groove 123 of the second side 12d of the anti-shake bracket 12 to be fixed to the second side 12d.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 can be a magnet or other magnetic component
  • the second anti-shake magnetic conductive component 136 is made of magnetic conductive material, such as silicon steel sheets and alloys formed by various iron products and rare earth elements.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic conductive component 136 can be located between the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 and the bottom wall of the second mounting groove 123.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic conductive component 136 can be fixed to the anti-shake bracket 12 by bonding or the like, and can also be formed as an integrally formed structural component with the anti-shake bracket 12 by insert-molding or the like.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 can be fixed to the second anti-shake magnetic conductive component 136 by bonding or the like.
  • the circuit board assembly 23 is mounted on the third side 12f of the anti-shake bracket 12 to be fixed to the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the focus coil 221 is fixed to the third side 12f of the anti-shake bracket 12 through the focus circuit board 231.
  • the focus coil 221 is at least partially located in the through hole 126, so that the circuit board assembly 23 and the anti-shake bracket 12 are compactly arranged, which is conducive to improving space utilization.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132, the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 and the circuit board assembly 23 are respectively fixed to the first side 12b, the second side 12d and the third side 12f of the anti-shake bracket 12, and all adopt a matching structure that is at least partially embedded, so that the arrangement structure between the multiple components is compact and the space utilization rate is high.
  • the fourth side 12g of the anti-shake bracket 12 maintains a small size without other matching components.
  • the width of the fourth side 12g is smaller than the width of the first side 12b and the width of the second side 12d, which is conducive to reducing the volume of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • FIG. 16 is a fourth schematic diagram of a partial structure of the motor 1 shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 is movably connected to the base 11, and the anti-shake bracket 12 is located on the side of the three supporting parts (141, 143, 145) of the guide bracket 14 facing away from the bottom plate 111 of the base 11, and can be located on the inner side of the side frame 112 of the base 11.
  • the first corner 12a of the anti-shake bracket 12 is arranged corresponding to the first supporting part 141 of the guide bracket 14
  • the second corner 12c of the anti-shake bracket 12 is arranged corresponding to the second supporting part 143 of the guide bracket 14
  • the third corner 12e of the anti-shake bracket 12 is arranged corresponding to the third supporting part 145 of the guide bracket 14.
  • the three supporting parts (141, 143, 145) of the guide bracket 14 are located between the anti-shake bracket 12 and the base 11, and are arranged one-to-one with the first corner 12a, the second corner 12c and the third corner 12e.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 is disposed opposite to the first anti-shake coil 131
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 is disposed opposite to the second anti-shake coil 133 .
  • the three second slide grooves 121 of the anti-shake bracket 12 are arranged in one-to-one correspondence with the three second grooves 146 of the guide bracket 14, and the second support member 152 installed in the second groove 146 is partially embedded in the second slide groove 121.
  • the first support portion 141, the second support portion 143 and the third support portion 145 of the guide bracket 14 are connected to the anti-shake bracket 12 through multiple second support members 152.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 is slidably connected to the guide bracket 14 through multiple second support members 152, and the relative sliding direction of the two is parallel to the guiding direction of the second support member 152.
  • the axial direction of the sliding shaft is the guiding direction of the second support member 152;
  • the arrangement direction of the multiple balls is the guiding direction of the second support member 152.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 and the second support member 152 are in line contact when they move relative to each other, which can avoid the risk of pits caused by excessive impact pressure and improve reliability.
  • the width of the contact position between the second support member 152 and the anti-shake bracket 12 can be increased to further improve the reliability of the structural matching.
  • the guide directions of the plurality of second support members 152 are parallel to the first direction X, so the anti-shake bracket 12 can slide relative to the guide bracket 14 along the first direction X.
  • the second support members 152 can also limit other structural members in the direction perpendicular to their guide directions.
  • the second support members 152 are provided so that the anti-shake bracket 12 and the guide bracket 14 are mutually limited in the second direction Y.
  • other limiting structures can also be provided between the anti-shake bracket 12 and the guide bracket 14 to achieve the limiting of the two in the second direction Y, and the embodiments of the present application are not strictly limited to this.
  • the guiding directions of the plurality of first supporting members 151 are different from the guiding directions of the plurality of second supporting members 152, so that the relative movement direction of the anti-shake bracket 12 and the guide bracket 14 is different from the relative movement direction of the guide bracket 14 and the base 11, and the anti-shake bracket 12 can realize the movement on the XY plane relative to the base 11.
  • the guiding directions may be perpendicular to each other, or may be intersecting but not perpendicular, and this is not strictly limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the guiding directions of the plurality of first support members 151 are parallel to the first direction X
  • the guiding directions of the plurality of second support members 152 are parallel to the second direction Y, so that the anti-shake bracket 12 can move along the second direction Y relative to the guide bracket 14, and the anti-shake bracket 12 and the guide bracket 14 can move together along the first direction X relative to the base 11.
  • the guiding directions of the plurality of first support members 151 may also be parallel to the second direction Y, and the guiding directions of the plurality of second support members 152 may also be parallel to the first direction X, so that the anti-shake bracket 12 can move relative to the guide bracket 14 along the first direction X, and the anti-shake bracket 12 and the guide bracket 14 can move relative to the base 11 along the second direction Y.
  • the extension direction of the plurality of first grooves 1111 of the base 11 and the direction of the plurality of first slide grooves 148 of the guide bracket 14 follow the guide direction of the plurality of first support members 151, that is, they change to be parallel to the second direction Y;
  • the extension direction of the plurality of second grooves 146 of the guide bracket 14 and the direction of the plurality of second slide grooves 121 of the anti-shake bracket 12 follow the guide direction of the plurality of second support members 152, that is, they change to be parallel to the first direction X.
  • the first side 12b of the anti-shake bracket 12 is set to correspond to the first connection portion 142 of the guide bracket 14, and is arranged corresponding to one side of the base 11, and the second side 12d of the anti-shake bracket 12 is set to correspond to the second connection portion 144 of the guide bracket 14, and is arranged corresponding to the other side of the base 11. Therefore, the anti-shake bracket 12 and the guide bracket 14 are compactly arranged and can make full use of the space in the three corner areas and two side areas of the base 11 for arrangement, and the space in the other two side areas of the base 11 is reduced, which is conducive to the miniaturized design of the motor 1.
  • the first connection portion 142 is located on the side of the first side portion 12b and the first anti-shake magnetic member 132 facing away from the activity space 124
  • the second connection portion 144 is located on the side of the second side portion 12d and the second anti-shake magnetic member 134 facing away from the activity space 124.
  • the first connection portion 142 and the second connection portion 144 of the anti-shake bracket 12 are arranged in an outer winding manner, and are staggered with the first side portion 12b and the second side portion 12d of the anti-shake bracket 12 in the third direction Z, thereby facilitating the reduction of the height of the motor 1 and achieving miniaturization.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of the focusing bracket 21 shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the focus bracket 21 may be substantially frame-shaped, and the focus bracket 21 has an installation space 215.
  • the focus bracket 21 is provided with a fifth installation slot 216, a first sliding slot 211, and a second sliding slot 212.
  • the fifth installation slot 216 is arranged away from the installation space 215.
  • the first sliding slot 211 and the second sliding slot 212 are arranged at intervals, both are arranged away from the installation space 215 and are respectively located on both sides of the fifth installation slot 216.
  • the extension direction of the first sliding slot 211 and the second sliding slot 212 may be parallel to the third direction Z.
  • FIG. 18 is a fifth schematic diagram of a partial structure of the motor 1 shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the focusing magnetic member 222 and the focusing magnetic conductive member 223 can be installed in the fifth mounting groove 216 of the focusing bracket 21 to be fixed to the focusing bracket 21.
  • the main part of the focusing magnetic conductive member 223 can be located between the focusing magnetic member 222 and the bottom wall of the fifth mounting groove 216.
  • the focusing magnetic conductive member 223 can be fixed to the focusing bracket 21 by bonding or the like, or can be formed into an integrally formed structural member with the focusing bracket 21 by insert-molding or the like.
  • the focusing magnetic member 222 can be fixed to the focusing magnetic conductive member 223 by bonding or the like.
  • FIG. 19 is a sixth schematic diagram of the partial structure of the motor 1 shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the focus bracket 21 is mounted on the inner side of the anti-shake bracket 12, and the focus magnetic member 222 is arranged opposite to the focus coil 221.
  • the first sliding groove 211 of the focus bracket 21 is arranged corresponding to the third mounting groove 127 of the anti-shake bracket 12, and the second sliding groove 212 of the focus bracket 21 is arranged corresponding to the fourth mounting groove 128 of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • One of the third support members 235 is installed in the third mounting groove 127 and is at least partially embedded in the first sliding groove 211; the other third support member 235 is installed in the fourth mounting groove 128 and is partially embedded in the second sliding groove 212.
  • the third support member 235 can be fixedly connected to the anti-shake bracket 12 by bonding or other means.
  • the focus bracket 21 is slidably connected to the anti-shake bracket 12 through the third support member 235, and the relative sliding direction of the two is parallel to the guiding direction of the third support member 235, that is, the third direction Z.
  • the third support member 235 adopts a sliding shaft structure
  • the axial direction of the sliding shaft is the guiding direction of the third support member 235
  • the third support member 235 adopts a ball structure
  • the arrangement direction of the plurality of balls is the guiding direction of the third support member 235.
  • the third support member 235 may include a first sliding shaft 235a and a second sliding shaft 235b, the first sliding shaft 235a is installed in the third mounting groove 127, and the second sliding shaft 235b is installed in the fourth mounting groove 128.
  • the installation space 215 of the focus bracket 21 is used to install the lens 2, and the central axis of the focus bracket 21 is parallel to the optical axis of the lens 2.
  • the distance between the central axis of the focus bracket 21 and the outer side surface of the fourth side 12g of the anti-shake bracket 12 can be smaller than the distance between the central axis of the focus bracket 21 and the outer side surface of the third side 12f of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 reserves more space at the third side 12f to facilitate the arrangement of the focus coil 221 and the focus magnetic member 222, and reserves less space at the fourth side 12g to reduce the volume, which is conducive to the miniaturization design of the motor 1.
  • the distance between the central axis of the focus bracket 21 and the outer side surface of the fourth side 12g of the anti-shake bracket 12 can also be equal to or greater than the distance between the central axis of the focus bracket 21 and the outer side surface of the third side 12f of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • FIG. 20 is a seventh schematic diagram of the partial structure of the motor 1 shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the arrangement plane of the plurality of first reeds 18 may be perpendicular to the third direction Z and located on the side of the anti-shake bracket 12 facing away from the bottom plate 111. That is, the plurality of first reeds 18 may be arranged in the XY plane.
  • the first spring piece 18 is connected to the side frame 112 of the second side portion 12d and the side frame 112 of the base 11. Among them, multiple first spring pieces 18 can be arranged in the space above the first side portion 12b and the second side portion 12d of the anti-shake bracket 12 to improve the space utilization of the motor 1.
  • first spring pieces 18 are used to provide elastic force to move the anti-shake bracket 12 back to the equilibrium position when the anti-shake bracket 12 moves relative to the base 11 and leaves the equilibrium position.
  • the first spring piece 18 can be made of conductive material to take into account the signal transmission function.
  • the arrangement plane of the plurality of second reeds 19 may be perpendicular to the third direction Z and located on the side of the focus bracket 21 facing away from the bottom plate 111. That is, the plurality of second reeds 19 may be arranged in the X-Y plane.
  • the plurality of second reeds 19 connect the anti-shake bracket 12 and the focus bracket 21.
  • the plurality of second reeds 19 are used to provide elastic force to move the focus bracket 21 back to the equilibrium position when the focus bracket 21 moves relative to the anti-shake bracket 12 and leaves the equilibrium position.
  • the second reeds 19 may be made of conductive material to take into account the signal transmission function.
  • the limit bracket 30 is fixed to the side of the anti-shake bracket 12 facing away from the bottom plate 111.
  • the limit bracket 30 includes a second stop block 301, and the second stop block 301 is arranged opposite to the focus bracket 21.
  • the number of the second stop blocks 301 can be one or more, and the plurality of second stop blocks 301 can be arranged at intervals corresponding to the circumference of the focus bracket 21. Referring to FIG. 16 and FIG. 20 , the first stop block 125 of the anti-shake bracket 12 and the second stop block 301 of the limit bracket 30 can cooperate to limit the movement stroke of the focus bracket 21 in the third direction Z to prevent the focus bracket 21 from detaching from the limit bracket 30, and also make the relative movement of the focus bracket 21 and the limit bracket 30 more reliable.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of the motor 1 shown in FIG. 4 at another angle.
  • the housing 40 is assembled and matched with the base 11, and the housing 40 is covered on the base 11.
  • the housing 40 can cover the side frame 112 of the base 11 (see FIG. 20 ).
  • the housing 40 cooperates with the base 11 to jointly encapsulate and protect the internal structure of the motor 1.
  • the housing 40 is provided with a through hole, and part of the structure of the motor 1 is exposed through the through hole, for example, part of the structure of the focus bracket 21 is exposed.
  • Figure 22 is a schematic diagram of the cross-sectional structure of the motor 1 shown in Figure 21 cut along B-B.
  • the focus coil 221 is fixed to the anti-shake bracket 12, the focus magnetic part 222 is fixed to the focus bracket 21, and the focus coil 221 is arranged facing the focus magnetic part 222, and is used to drive the focus bracket 21 to move along the third direction Z relative to the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the focus bracket 21 moves along the third direction Z relative to the anti-shake bracket 12, the focus bracket 21 can drive the lens 2 mounted thereon to move along the third direction Z.
  • the motor 1 can realize automatic focusing of the camera module 100.
  • the focus coil 221 is arranged facing the focus magnetic part 222, which means that the winding plane of the focus coil 221 faces the focus magnetic part 222.
  • the focus sensor 234 fixed to the focus circuit board 231 can be used to detect the position change of the focus bracket 21 in the third direction Z.
  • the movement direction of the focus bracket 21 is perpendicular to the magnetic gap between the focus magnetic part 222 and the focus coil 221.
  • the above-mentioned magnetic gap is not affected by the movement of the focus bracket 21. Therefore, the problem of rapid decrease in driving force due to the increase in the magnetic gap can be avoided, thereby ensuring that the focus driving force of the motor 1 is large and the driving force is relatively stable, which is beneficial to the large stroke design of the focus function of the motor 1.
  • the focusing magnetic member 222 can have two polarity directions in opposite directions, and the polarity direction of the focusing magnetic member 222 is arranged perpendicular to the winding plane of the focusing coil 221.
  • the coils in the two sections of the focusing coil 221 can be respectively arranged corresponding to the two polarity directions of the focusing magnetic member 222, and the currents in the coils in the two sections flow in opposite directions.
  • the polarity direction can be the direction from the North Pole (N) to the South Pole (S), or the direction from the South Pole (S) to the North Pole (N).
  • the side of the focusing magnetic member 222 facing the focusing coil 221 includes the North Pole (N) and the South Pole (S), and the side of the focusing magnetic member 222 facing away from the focusing coil 221 includes the South Pole (S) and the North Pole (N) correspondingly.
  • the focusing magnetic member 222 may include one or more magnets, and the implementation structure of the focusing magnetic member 222 may be various.
  • the focusing magnetic member 222 may adopt a dual magnet solution, for example, it may be composed of two magnets, and the two magnets are arranged in a third direction Z and have opposite polarity directions.
  • the focusing magnetic member 222 is a Halbach magnet array.
  • the focusing magnetic member 222 may adopt a single magnet solution, for example, it may be composed of a magnet, and the magnet includes two parts with opposite polarity directions. The magnet may be made using a bipolar magnetization process.
  • a magnetic attraction force is formed between the focusing magnetic member 222 and the focusing magnetic conductive member 223, so that the focusing bracket 21 tends to approach the third edge 12f of the anti-shake bracket 12, and the focusing bracket 21, the third support member 235 and the anti-shake bracket 12 maintain contact.
  • the third support member 235 can better guide the focusing bracket 21 to move along the third direction Z relative to the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • FIG. 23 is a partial structural diagram of the structure shown in FIG. 22 .
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 is fixed to the anti-shake bracket 12, the first anti-shake coil 131 is fixed to the base 11, and the first anti-shake coil 131 is arranged facing the first anti-shake magnetic component 132, and is used to drive the anti-shake bracket 12 to move relative to the base 11 along the first direction X, and the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 and the first anti-shake coil 131 are arranged in the third direction Z.
  • the first anti-shake coil 131 is arranged facing the first anti-shake magnetic component 132, which means that the winding plane of the first anti-shake coil 131 faces the first anti-shake magnetic component 132.
  • the winding plane of the first anti-shake coil 131 can be arranged parallel to the X-Y plane.
  • the first anti-shake sensor 171 fixed to the bottom plate 111 of the base 11 can be used to detect the position change of the anti-shake bracket 12 in the first direction X.
  • the movement direction of the anti-shake bracket 12 is vertical.
  • the magnetic gap is perpendicular to the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 and the first anti-shake coil 131.
  • the above magnetic gap is not affected by the movement of the anti-shake bracket 12. Therefore, the problem of rapid decrease in driving force due to the increase in the magnetic gap can be avoided, thereby ensuring that the anti-shake driving force of the motor 1 is large and the driving force is relatively stable, which is beneficial to the large-stroke design of the optical anti-shake function of the motor 1.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 can have two opposite polarity directions (as shown by the arrows in Figure 23), and the polarity direction of the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 is set perpendicular to the winding plane of the first anti-shake coil 131.
  • the coils in the two sections of the first anti-shake coil 131 can be respectively set corresponding to the two polarity directions of the first anti-shake magnetic component 132, and the currents in the coils in the two sections flow in opposite directions.
  • the side of the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 facing the first anti-shake coil 131 includes a north pole (N) and a south pole (S), and the side of the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 facing away from the focus coil 221 includes a south pole (S) and a north pole (N) correspondingly.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 may include one or more magnets, and the implementation structure of the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 may be multiple.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 may adopt a dual magnet structure, for example, composed of two magnets, the two magnets are arranged in the first direction X, and the polarity directions are opposite.
  • FIG24 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 shown in FIG22 in some embodiments, and the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 is a Halbach magnet array.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 may include at least three magnets, and among the three adjacent magnets, the polarization directions of the two magnets located on the sides are opposite and perpendicular to the arrangement direction of the three magnets, and the polarization direction of the magnet located in the middle is from one magnet to another magnet.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 may also adopt a single magnet structure, for example, composed of a magnet including two parts with opposite polarities, and the magnet may be manufactured by a bipolar magnetization process.
  • Figure 25 is a schematic diagram of the cross-sectional structure of the motor 1 shown in Figure 21 taken along C-C.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 is fixed to the anti-shake bracket 12, the second anti-shake coil 133 is fixed to the base 11, and the second anti-shake coil 133 is arranged facing the second anti-shake magnetic component 134, and is used to drive the anti-shake bracket 12 to move relative to the base 11 along the second direction Y, and the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 and the second anti-shake coil 133 are arranged in the third direction Z.
  • the second anti-shake coil 133 is arranged facing the second anti-shake magnetic component 134, which means that the winding plane of the second anti-shake coil 133 faces the second anti-shake magnetic component 134.
  • the winding plane of the second anti-shake coil 133 can be arranged parallel to the X-Y plane.
  • the second anti-shake sensor 172 fixed to the bottom plate 111 of the base 11 can be used to detect the position change of the anti-shake bracket 12 in the second direction Y.
  • the movement direction of the anti-shake bracket 12 is perpendicular to the magnetic gap between the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 and the second anti-shake coil 133.
  • the above magnetic gap is not affected by the movement of the anti-shake bracket 12. Therefore, the problem of rapid decrease in driving force due to the increase in magnetic gap can be avoided, thereby ensuring that the anti-shake driving force of the motor 1 is large and the driving force is relatively stable, which is beneficial to the large-stroke design of the optical anti-shake function of the motor 1.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 can drive the focus bracket 21 and the lens 2 to move relative to the base 11 along the first direction X and/or the second direction Y, thereby realizing the movement of the X-Y plane.
  • the motor 1 can realize the optical image stabilization of the camera module 100. Based on the arrangement position and other related designs of the first anti-shake magnetic part 132, the first anti-shake coil 131, the second anti-shake magnetic part 134 and the second anti-shake coil 133, the motor 1 can realize the large stroke design of optical image stabilization to obtain a better shooting experience.
  • the direction in which the first anti-shake coil 131 and the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 drive the anti-shake bracket 12 to move is perpendicular to the direction in which the second anti-shake coil 133 and the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 drive the anti-shake bracket 12 to move; in some other embodiments, the direction in which the first anti-shake coil 131 and the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 drive the anti-shake bracket 12 to move is perpendicular to the direction in which the second anti-shake coil 133 and the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 drive the anti-shake bracket 12 to move, but are not perpendicular to each other.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 may have two polarity directions in opposite directions, and the polarity direction of the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 is arranged perpendicular to the winding plane of the second anti-shake coil 133.
  • the coils of the two sections of the second anti-shake coil 133 may be arranged corresponding to the two polarity directions of the second anti-shake magnetic component 134, respectively, and the currents in the coils of the two sections flow in opposite directions.
  • the side of the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 facing the second anti-shake coil 133 includes a north pole (N) and a south pole (S), and the side of the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 facing away from the focus coil 221 includes a south pole (S) and a north pole (N) correspondingly.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 may include one or more magnets, and the implementation structure of the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 may be multiple.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 may adopt a dual magnet structure, for example, composed of two magnets, the two magnets are arranged in the second direction Y, and the polarity directions are opposite.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 is a Halbach magnet array.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 may include at least three magnets, and the polarization directions of the two magnets located on the edges of the three adjacent magnets are opposite and perpendicular to the arrangement direction of the three magnets, and the polarization direction of the magnet located in the middle is from one magnet to another magnet.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 may also adopt a single magnet structure, for example, composed of a magnet, the magnet includes two parts with opposite polarity directions, and the magnet can be made using a bipolar magnetization process.
  • the coils and magnetic components of the anti-shake drive mechanism 13 of the motor 1 are roughly arranged in the XY plane.
  • the width of the magnetic member i.e., the size of the first anti-shake magnetic member 132 in the first direction X, and the size of the second anti-shake magnetic member 134 in the second direction Y
  • the width of the magnetic member can increase the movement stroke of the anti-shake bracket 12 in the first direction X and/or the second direction Y, which is conducive to realizing a long-stroke design of optical image stabilization without increasing the height of the motor 1.
  • the movement resistance of the motor 1 during the optical image stabilization process is mainly the sliding friction between the support member and the matching structural member, which is unrelated to the movement stroke, the resistance will not increase significantly when performing optical image stabilization with a long stroke, thereby realizing a long-stroke design of optical image stabilization without significantly increasing the driving force.
  • the focus drive mechanism 22 and the anti-shake drive mechanism 13 of the motor 1 are both of moving magnet design, and the driving of the motor 1 in the first direction X, the second direction Y and the third direction Z are all controlled separately by a group of driving parts (including coils and magnetic parts).
  • a group of driving parts including coils and magnetic parts.
  • the focus bracket 21 moves with the anti-shake bracket 12, and the relative position of the two is not affected, and the magnetic gap width of the focus drive mechanism 22 does not change. Therefore, the focus drive mechanism 22 and the anti-shake drive mechanism 13 of the motor 1 are decoupled and do not interfere with each other during movement, which is conducive to ensuring the driving accuracy of the motor 1.
  • the focus bracket 21 is located on the inner side of the anti-shake bracket 12, the focus coil 221 is fixed to the anti-shake bracket 12, and the focus magnetic part 222 is fixed to the focus bracket 21, the optical image stabilization moving subassembly of the motor 1 wraps the focus moving subassembly.
  • the focus bracket 21 is located on the inner side of the anti-shake bracket 12. It can be understood that when the focus bracket 21 is located on the inner side of the anti-shake bracket 12, the anti-shake bracket 12 can be arranged around the focus bracket 21. Surrounding can be that the anti-shake bracket 12 is arranged around the focus bracket 21, or it can be that a part of the anti-shake bracket 12 is arranged around the focus bracket 21. In this embodiment, the anti-shake bracket 12 is frame-shaped. At this time, the anti-shake bracket 12 is arranged around the focus bracket 21.
  • the anti-shake bracket is located on the inner side of the focus bracket. At this time, when the camera module needs to focus, the focus bracket needs to drive the anti-shake bracket, the lens and the variable aperture to move along the third direction. In this way, the weight of the mover composed of the focus bracket, the anti-shake bracket, the lens and the variable aperture is heavy, which causes the focus drive mechanism to increase the driving force by increasing the volume. Therefore, this setting is not conducive to the lightweight and miniaturized design of the motor.
  • the mover in the focusing process of this embodiment can omit the anti-shake bracket 12, that is, the weight of the mover composed of the focus bracket 21, the lens 2 and the variable aperture 3 is light, which is conducive to the miniaturized setting of the focus drive mechanism 22.
  • the motor 1 of this embodiment can achieve lightweight and miniaturized settings.
  • the distance between the connection position between the focus bracket 21 and the anti-shake bracket 12 and the center of gravity of the mover formed by the focus bracket 21, the lens 2 and the variable aperture 3 is relatively close, which is beneficial to reduce the risk of the mover tipping over.
  • the anti-shake bracket requires at least two anti-shake drive mechanisms to push the anti-shake bracket to move in the X-Y plane.
  • the motor needs to arrange at least two sets of lines to provide signals and power to the anti-shake drive mechanism. And at least two sets of lines need to pass through the focus bracket. Therefore, the power-on setting of this solution is relatively complicated, which increases the difficulty of setting the motor.
  • the motor 1 by setting the focus bracket 21 on the inner side of the anti-shake bracket 12, since the focus bracket 21 requires a set of focus drive mechanisms 22 to push the focus bracket 21 to move along the third direction Z, the motor 1 also needs a set of lines to provide signals and power to the focus drive mechanism 22, that is, a set of lines needs to pass through the anti-shake bracket 12. Therefore, the power-on scheme of the solution of this embodiment is relatively simple, which can greatly reduce the difficulty of setting the motor 1.
  • the focus bracket 21 by arranging the focus bracket 21 inside the anti-shake bracket 12, the focus coil 221 and the focus magnetic member 222 can be arranged closer to the lens 2. In this way, when the focus coil 221 and the focus magnetic member 222 are arranged vertically, the focus coil 221 and the focus magnetic member 222 can partially protrude from the upper surface of the motor 1. It is understandable that the protruding portion can be arranged inside the camera decorative member to better improve the space utilization of the camera decorative member.
  • the plane around which the wire of the focus coil 221 is wound (i.e., the winding plane) may be parallel to the third direction Z.
  • the focus coil 221 is arranged vertically, so that the focus coil 221 may occupy a smaller area in the X-Y plane, thereby facilitating the miniaturization of the motor 1.
  • the focus magnetic member 222 may include two opposite polarity directions, both of which are perpendicular to the third direction Z. At this time, the focus magnetic member 222 may be arranged vertically, thereby reducing the space occupied by the focus magnetic member 222 in the X-Y plane, facilitating the miniaturization of the motor 1.
  • the anti-shake drive mechanism 13 of the motor 1 is arranged using the space on both sides of the anti-shake bracket 12, and the focus drive mechanism 22 is arranged using the space on the third side of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the remaining space on one side of the anti-shake bracket 12 does not need to be arranged with a drive component, so that the motor 1 can ensure the focusing function and the anti-shake function while having a compact overall structure and high space utilization, which is conducive to miniaturized design.
  • Figure 26 is a schematic diagram of the cross-sectional structure of the motor 1 shown in Figure 21 cut along D-D
  • Figure 27 is a schematic diagram of the cross-sectional structure of the motor 1 shown in Figure 21 cut along E-E.
  • the first support portion 141 of the guide bracket 14 is located between the first corner portion 12a of the anti-shake bracket 12 and the bottom plate 111 of the base 11.
  • the first support portion 141 is connected to the base 11 through one of the first support members 151, and is connected to the anti-shake bracket 12 through one of the second support members 152.
  • the second support portion 143 of the guide bracket 14 is located between the second corner portion 12c of the anti-shake bracket 12 and the bottom plate 111 of the base 11, the second support portion 143 is connected to the base 11 through another first support member 151, and is connected to the anti-shake bracket 12 through another second support member 152.
  • the third support portion 145 of the guide bracket 14 is located between the third corner portion 12e of the anti-shake bracket 12 and the bottom plate 111 of the base 11, the third support portion 145 is connected to the base 11 through another first support member 151, and is connected to the anti-shake bracket 12 through another second support member 152.
  • the three supporting parts (141, 143, 145) of the guide bracket 14 are all located between the anti-shake bracket 12 and the base 11, and are arranged one-to-one corresponding to the first corner 12a, the second corner 12c and the third corner 12e of the anti-shake bracket 12, and the three supporting parts (141, 143, 145) are connected to the base 11 through a plurality of first supporting members 151.
  • the guiding directions of the plurality of first supporting members 151 are different from the guiding directions of the plurality of second supporting members 152, so that the relative movement direction between the anti-shake bracket 12 and the guide bracket 14 is different from the relative movement direction between the guide bracket 14 and the base 11.
  • the guide bracket 14 is L-shaped, which has a significantly smaller volume than a frame-shaped structure and can save space on both sides, thereby facilitating the miniaturization of the motor 1 and the camera module 100 . Furthermore, since the three supporting parts (141, 143, 145) of the guide bracket 14 are arranged corresponding to the three corner parts (12a, 12c, 12e) of the anti-shake bracket 12, the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 and the first anti-shake coil 131 are located between the first supporting part 141 and the second supporting part 143, and the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 and the second anti-shake coil 133 are located between the second supporting part 143 and the third supporting part 145.
  • the guide bracket 14 can ensure the connection reliability of the anti-shake bracket 12 and the base 11 while reducing the volume, and can achieve the functions of stable support and accurate guiding, ensuring the stability of the relative positions of the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 and the first anti-shake coil 131 and the relative positions of the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 and the second anti-shake coil 133, so that the optical anti-shake movement of the motor 1 is smooth and reliable.
  • the motor 1 is designed with a double-layer bracket of a guide bracket 14 and an anti-shake bracket 12.
  • Each layer of the bracket cooperates with the support member and the adjacent structural member to form a guide in one direction.
  • the guides in the two directions will not cause crosstalk, which is conducive to achieving precise guidance of optical image stabilization.
  • the guide bracket 14 and the anti-shake bracket 12 can move together relative to the base 11 along the second direction Y, and based on the guiding effect of the multiple second support members 152, the anti-shake bracket 12 can move relative to the guide bracket 14 along the first direction X.
  • the motor 1 can achieve precise guidance during the optical image stabilization process through the matching structure of the base 11, the first support member 151, the guide bracket 14, the second support member 152 and the anti-shake bracket 12, thereby solving the problem of excessive tilt of the lens 2 when the conventional motor 1 performs optical image stabilization.
  • the motor 1 arranges the anti-shake driving mechanism 13 and the guide bracket 14 on two sides corresponding to the first side 12b and the second side 12d of the anti-shake bracket 12, the side corresponding to the third side 12f of the anti-shake bracket 12 is used to arrange the focus driving mechanism 22, and the side corresponding to the fourth side 12g of the anti-shake bracket 12 is not arranged with the driving mechanism. Therefore, the motor 1 can make full use of its three sides to arrange the driving mechanism, and the remaining side is minimized as much as possible, which is conducive to the overall miniaturization of the motor 1.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 is fixed to the bottom plate 111 of the base, for example, it can be located on the side of the first anti-shake coil 131 facing away from the first anti-shake magnetic component 132.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 is arranged facing the first anti-shake magnetic component 132, and the magnetic force between the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 and the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 makes the anti-shake bracket 12 have a tendency to approach the bottom plate 111 of the base 11. As shown in FIG. 25 and FIG.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 is fixed to the bottom plate 111 of the base, for example, it can be located on the side of the second anti-shake coil 133 facing away from the second anti-shake magnetic component 134.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 is arranged facing the second anti-shake magnetic component 134, and the magnetic force between the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 and the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 makes the anti-shake bracket 12 have a tendency to approach the bottom plate 111 of the base 11.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 tends to approach the bottom plate 111 of the base 11, thereby ensuring that the base 11, the second support component 152, the guide bracket 14, the first support component 151 and the anti-shake bracket 12 maintain contact and achieve pre-tightening.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 is disposed opposite to the first anti-shake magnetic component 132, and the size of the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 in the first direction X is larger than the size of the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 in the first direction X. At this time, the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 protrudes relative to both sides of the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 in the first direction X. During the optical image stabilization process of the motor 1, the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 can still maintain a facing relationship or an almost facing relationship with the first anti-shake magnetic component 132, thereby ensuring the stability of the magnetic attraction.
  • the projection of the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 on the X-Y plane covers the projection of the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 on the X-Y plane in the first direction X, and it can be considered that the two are in a facing relationship.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 is directly opposite to the second anti-shake magnetic component 134, and the size of the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 is larger than the size of the second anti-shake magnetic component 134.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 protrudes relative to the two sides of the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 in the second direction Y.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 can still maintain a directly opposite relationship or a nearly directly opposite relationship with the second anti-shake magnetic component 134, thereby ensuring the stability of the magnetic attraction.
  • the projection of the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 on the X-Y plane covers the projection of the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 on the X-Y plane in the second direction Y, and the two can be considered to be directly opposite.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic member 161 is located between the first support portion 141 and the second support portion 143
  • the second anti-shake magnetic member 162 is located between the second support portion 143 and the third support portion 145
  • the magnetic force between the anti-shake magnetic parts 132 and the magnetic force between the second anti-shake magnetic parts 162 and the second anti-shake magnetic parts 134 can better ensure the connection between the three supporting parts (141, 143, 145) of the guide bracket 14 through the supporting parts and the base 11 and the anti-shake bracket 12, thereby improving the reliability of the optical anti-shake process of the motor 1.
  • the center distance between the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 and the first corner 12a is smaller than the center distance between the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 and the second corner 12c; as shown in FIG27, in the first direction X, the center distance between the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 and the third corner 12e is smaller than the center distance between the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 and the second corner 12c.
  • the position setting of the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 and the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 can make the pre-tightening force between the three supporting parts (141, 143, 145) of the guide bracket 14 and the base 11 and the anti-shake bracket 12 more balanced and reliable.
  • the size, shape and position of the first anti-shake magnetic component 161 and the second anti-shake magnetic component 162 may also be adjusted, and the embodiment of the present application does not strictly limit this.
  • the cooperation between the plurality of first support members 151 and the guide bracket 14 includes tight fit and loose fit to reduce the difficulty of assembly.
  • the plurality of first chutes 148 of the guide bracket 14 include at least one "V"-shaped groove and at least one "U”-shaped groove or "L”-shaped groove.
  • the side groove wall of the first chutes 148 contacts the first support member 151 to achieve a tight fit.
  • the first chutes 148 located at the first support portion 141 and the second support portion 143 are "V"-shaped grooves.
  • the bottom groove wall of the first chutes 148 contacts the first support member 151 to achieve a loose fit.
  • the first chutes 148 located at the third support portion 145 are "U"-shaped grooves.
  • the cooperation between the plurality of second support members 152 and the anti-shake bracket 12 includes a tight fit and a loose fit to reduce the difficulty of assembly.
  • the plurality of second slide grooves 121 of the anti-shake bracket 12 include at least one "V"-shaped groove and at least one "U”-shaped groove or "L”-shaped groove.
  • the side groove wall of the second slide groove 121 contacts the second support member 152 to achieve a tight fit.
  • the second slide groove 121 located at the second corner 12c and the third corner 12e is a "V"-shaped groove.
  • the bottom groove wall of the second slide groove 121 contacts the second support member 152 to achieve a loose fit.
  • the second slide groove 121 located at the first corner 12a is a "U"-shaped groove.
  • the tight fit and loose fit design between the multiple first support members 151 and the guide bracket 14 may have other implementation schemes, such as two loose fits and one tight fit combination, or the arrangement positions of the tight fit and the loose fit change, etc., and the embodiment of the present application does not strictly limit this.
  • the tight fit and loose fit design between the multiple second support members 152 and the anti-shake bracket 12 may have other implementation schemes, such as two loose fits and one tight fit combination, or the arrangement positions of the tight fit and the loose fit change, etc., and the embodiment of the present application does not strictly limit this.
  • the first side 12b, the second side 12d, the third side 12f and the fourth side 12g of the anti-shake bracket 12 are arranged clockwise, and the positions of the first anti-shake magnetic component 132, the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 and the focus coil 221 are arranged clockwise accordingly.
  • the multiple sides of the anti-shake bracket 12 may also have different arrangement positions. For example:
  • Figure 28 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the motor 1 shown in Figure 4 in other embodiments
  • Figure 29 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the structure shown in Figure 28.
  • This embodiment can include most of the technical solutions of the previous embodiment, and the following mainly describes the difference between the two, and most of the same contents of the two are not repeated.
  • the first side 12b, the second side 12d, the third side 12f and the fourth side 12g of the anti-shake bracket 12 are arranged counterclockwise, and the first anti-shake magnetic component 132, the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 and the focus coil 221 are arranged clockwise accordingly.
  • Other related structures in this embodiment are adaptively adjusted.
  • the anti-shake magnetic component is fixed to the bottom plate 111 of the base 11, the three supporting parts (141, 143, 145) of the guide bracket 14 are located between the anti-shake bracket 12 and the bottom plate 111 of the base 11, the first supporting part 151 is located between the three supporting parts (141, 143, 145) of the guide bracket 14 and the bottom plate 111 of the base 11, and the pre-tightening structure of the motor 1 adopts the lower magnetic attraction solution.
  • the pre-tightening structure of the motor 1 also adopts the upper magnetic attraction solution, and the structure of the base 11, the structure and position of the anti-shake magnetic component, the structure and position of the guide bracket 14, and the structure and position of the anti-shake bracket 12 are adjusted. For example:
  • Figure 30 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the motor 1 shown in Figure 4 in some other embodiments
  • Figure 31 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the structure shown in Figure 30.
  • This embodiment can include most of the technical solutions of the previous embodiment, and the following mainly describes the difference between the two, and most of the same contents of the two are not repeated.
  • the base 11 includes a bottom plate 111, a side frame 112, and a top plate 113.
  • the top plate 113 is arranged opposite to the bottom plate 111, and the side frame 112 is connected between the bottom plate 111 and the top plate 113.
  • the top plate 113, the side plates, and the top plate 113 of the base 11 are mutually fixed structures.
  • the bottom plate 111 and the side frame 112 can be integrally formed structural parts, and the top plate 113 and the side frame 112 can be assembled to form an integrated structure.
  • the top plate 113 and the side frame 112 may be integrally formed structural members, and the bottom plate 111 and the side frame 112 may be assembled to form an integrated structure.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 and the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 are fixed to the anti-shake bracket 12
  • the first anti-shake coil 131 and the second anti-shake coil 133 are fixed to the bottom plate 111
  • the first anti-shake coil 131 is arranged facing the first anti-shake magnetic component 132
  • the second anti-shake coil 133 is arranged facing the second anti-shake magnetic component 134
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 can move along the X-Y plane relative to the base 11 to achieve optical image stabilization.
  • Figure 32 is a schematic structural diagram of the top plate 113 shown in Figure 31 at another angle
  • Figure 33 is a schematic structural diagram of the anti-shake bracket 12 shown in Figure 31 at another angle.
  • the three corners of the bottom plate 111 of the base 11 may not be provided with grooves.
  • the top plate 113 of the base 11 may be provided with a plurality of third slide grooves 1131, and the plurality of third slide grooves 1131 may be respectively located at the three corners of the top plate 113, and the extension direction of the third slide grooves 1131 may be parallel to the first direction X.
  • the guide bracket 14 may be provided with a plurality of third grooves 149 and a plurality of fourth slide grooves 1410. The plurality of third grooves 149 are respectively located at the first support portion 141, the second support portion 143 and the third support portion 145, and the extension direction of the third grooves 149 may be parallel to the first direction X.
  • the plurality of fourth slide grooves 1410 are arranged opposite to the plurality of third grooves 149, and the plurality of fourth slide grooves 1410 are respectively located at the first support portion 141, the second support portion 143 and the third support portion 145, and the extension direction of the fourth slide grooves 1410 may be parallel to the second direction Y.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 is provided with a plurality of fourth grooves 129 , which can be respectively located at the first corner portion 12 a , the second corner portion 12 c and the third corner portion 12 e , and the extension direction of the fourth grooves 129 can be parallel to the second direction Y.
  • Figure 34 is a schematic diagram of the cross-sectional structure of the structure shown in Figure 30 cut along F-F
  • Figure 35 is a schematic diagram of the cross-sectional structure of the structure shown in Figure 30 cut along G-G.
  • the anti-shake driving mechanism 13 includes an anti-shake magnetic member 16, and the anti-shake magnetic member 16 is fixed to the top plate 113 of the base 11.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 is located on the inner side of the side frame 112, and the three supporting parts (141, 143, 145) of the guide bracket 14 are located between the anti-shake bracket 12 and the top plate 113.
  • the magnetic attraction between the anti-shake magnetic member 16 and the first anti-shake magnetic member 132 and the second anti-shake magnetic member 134 makes the anti-shake bracket 12 have a tendency to approach the top plate 113.
  • the first support portion 141 of the guide bracket 14 is located between the first corner portion 12a of the anti-shake bracket 12 and the top plate 113
  • the second support portion 143 of the guide bracket 14 is located between the second corner portion 12c of the anti-shake bracket 12 and the top plate 113
  • the third support portion 145 of the guide bracket 14 is located between the third corner portion 12e of the anti-shake bracket 12 and the top plate 113.
  • a plurality of first support members 151 are mounted on the plurality of third grooves 149 of the guide bracket 14 in a one-to-one correspondence, a plurality of third slide grooves 1131 of the top plate 113 are arranged in a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of third grooves 149 of the guide bracket 14, and a portion of the first support member 151 mounted on the third groove 149 is embedded in the first slide groove 148.
  • the guide bracket 14 is slidably connected to the top plate 113 through the plurality of first support members 151, and the relative sliding direction of the two is parallel to the guiding direction of the plurality of first support members 151.
  • the plurality of second support members 152 are mounted one-to-one in the plurality of fourth grooves 129 of the anti-shake bracket 12, and the plurality of fourth slide grooves 1410 of the guide bracket 14 are arranged one-to-one in the plurality of fourth grooves 129 of the anti-shake bracket 12, and the second support members 152 mounted in the fourth grooves 129 are partially embedded in the fourth slide grooves 1410.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 is slidably connected to the guide bracket 14 through the plurality of second support members 152, and the relative sliding direction of the two is parallel to the guiding direction of the plurality of second support members 152.
  • the guiding directions of the first supporting members 151 intersect with the guiding directions of the second supporting members 152.
  • the guiding directions of the first supporting members 151 may be parallel to the first direction X
  • the guiding directions of the second supporting members 152 may be parallel to the second direction Y.
  • the guiding directions of the first supporting members 151 and the guiding directions of the second supporting members 152 may be swapped, and the extending directions of the grooves and/or slides on the top plate 113, the guide bracket 14, and the anti-shake bracket 12 may be adaptively changed.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 since the anti-shake bracket 12 has a tendency to approach the top plate 113 under the magnetic force, it can ensure that the top plate 113, the plurality of first support members 151, the guide bracket 14, the plurality of second support members 152 and the anti-shake bracket 12 are in contact, so that precise guidance is achieved during the movement of the anti-shake bracket 12 relative to the base 11, so as to improve the reliability and accuracy of the optical image stabilization.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 When the anti-shake bracket 12 is subjected to a driving force parallel to the guiding direction of the first support member 151, the anti-shake bracket 12 and the guide bracket 14 move together relative to the base 11 along the guiding direction of the first support member 151; when the anti-shake bracket 12 is subjected to a driving force parallel to the guiding direction of the second support member 152, the guide bracket 14 is stationary relative to the base 11, and the anti-shake bracket 12 moves relative to the guide bracket 14 and the base 11 along the guiding direction of the second support member 152.
  • the top plate 113 may be L-shaped.
  • the top plate 113 may include three corner areas spaced apart from each other and two side areas connecting the three corner areas, and the two side areas are arranged at an angle.
  • the top plate 113 is arranged corresponding to the guide bracket 14.
  • the three corner areas of the top plate 113 are arranged corresponding to the three supporting parts (141, 143, 145) of the guide bracket 14, and the two side areas of the top plate 113 are arranged corresponding to the two connecting parts (142, 144) of the guide bracket 14.
  • the top plate 113 is small in size when it cooperates with other structures to achieve the guiding effect, which is conducive to the miniaturized design of the motor 1.
  • the top plate 113 may also be frame-shaped.
  • the first connection portion 142 of the guide bracket 14 may be stacked between the first side portion 12b of the anti-shake bracket 12 and the top plate 113, and the second connection portion 144 of the guide bracket 14 may be stacked between the second side portion 12d of the anti-shake bracket 12 and the top plate 113.
  • the first connection portion 142 may be located on the side of the first side portion 12b facing away from the activity space 124
  • the second connection portion 144 may be located on the side of the second side portion 12d facing away from the activity space 124.
  • an outer winding arrangement is adopted to reduce the height of the motor 1 and achieve miniaturization.
  • the anti-shake magnetic suction component 16 is located on the side of the top plate 113 facing away from the guide bracket 14, and the anti-shake magnetic suction component 16 is an integrated structural component.
  • the number of anti-shake magnetic suction components 16 is small, and the assembly is convenient.
  • the area of the anti-shake magnetic suction component 16 is large, which can ensure the size and stability of the magnetic force between the anti-shake magnetic suction component 16 and the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 and the second anti-shake magnetic component 134, so as to improve the reliability of the optical anti-shake of the motor 1.
  • the motor 1 further includes a plurality of first springs 18, the arrangement plane of the plurality of first springs 18 may be parallel to the third direction Z, and be located on the side of the anti-shake bracket 12 that is not facing the first side portion 12b or the second side portion 12d, for example, may be arranged close to the outer side of the third side portion 12f or the fourth side portion 12g of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the plurality of first springs 18 connect the anti-shake bracket 12 and the bottom plate 111.
  • the plurality of first springs 18 are arranged in the X-Z plane or the Y-Z plane, and the plurality of first springs 18 are compactly arranged with the base 11 and the anti-shake bracket 12, which is conducive to reducing the height of the motor 1 and realizing the miniaturization of the motor 1.
  • the anti-shake driving mechanism 13 of the motor 1 mainly adopts a single-coil driving solution. In some other embodiments, the anti-shake driving mechanism 13 of the motor 1 may also adopt a dual-coil driving solution. For example:
  • Figure 36 is a partial structural diagram of the motor 1 shown in Figure 4 in other embodiments
  • Figure 37 is a schematic diagram of the exploded structure of the structure shown in Figure 36
  • Figure 38 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the structure shown in Figure 37 at another angle
  • Figure 39 is a schematic diagram of the cross-sectional structure of the structure shown in Figure 36 cut along H-H.
  • This embodiment can include most of the technical solutions of the previous embodiment, and the following mainly describes the differences between the two, and most of the same contents of the two are not repeated.
  • the base 11 includes a bottom plate 111, a side frame 112, and a top plate 113.
  • the top plate 113 is arranged opposite to the bottom plate 111, and the side frame 112 is connected between the bottom plate 111 and the top plate 113.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 is fixed to the first side portion 12b of the anti-shake bracket 12, and the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 is fixed to the second side portion 12d of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 is located on the inner side of the side frame 112.
  • the first anti-shake coil 131 may include a first sub-coil 1311 and a second sub-coil 1312.
  • the first sub-coil 1311 is fixed to the bottom plate 111 and arranged facing the first anti-shake magnetic component 132
  • the second sub-coil 1312 is fixed to the top plate 113 and arranged facing the first anti-shake magnetic component 132.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic member 132 may have two opposite polarity directions (as shown by arrows in FIG. 39 ), and the polarity direction of the first anti-shake magnetic member 132 is perpendicular to the winding plane of the first sub-coil 1311 and the winding plane of the second sub-coil 1312.
  • the second anti-shake coil 133 may include a third sub-coil 1331 and a fourth sub-coil 1332.
  • the third sub-coil 1331 is fixed to the bottom plate 111 and is disposed facing the second anti-shake magnetic component 134.
  • the fourth sub-coil 1332 is fixed to the top plate 113 and is disposed facing the first anti-shake magnetic component 132.
  • the anti-shake bracket 12 is driven to move relative to the base 11 along the first direction X.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 may have two opposite polarity directions (as shown by the arrows in FIG. 39 ), and the polarity direction of the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 is perpendicular to the winding plane of the third sub-coil 1331 and the winding plane of the fourth sub-coil 1332.
  • the anti-shake drive mechanism 13 of the motor 1 adopts a dual-coil drive solution, which can provide greater driving force, is conducive to improving driving efficiency, and increases the optical anti-shake stroke.
  • the first sub-coil 1311 and the second sub-coil 1312 are respectively located on opposite sides of the first anti-shake magnetic part 132, the accompanying forces of the driving forces of the first sub-coil 1311 and the second sub-coil 1312 can offset each other, thereby achieving a more accurate driving action.
  • the accompanying forces of the driving forces of the first sub-coil 1311 and the second sub-coil 1312 can offset each other, thereby achieving a more accurate driving action.
  • the accompanying force refers to the component of the magnetic force in the non-moving direction caused by the inclination of the magnetic field lines at the edge of the magnetic part.
  • the conductive part of the base 11 may include a first part arranged on the bottom plate 111, a second part arranged on the side frame 112, and a third part arranged on the top plate 113, the first sub-coil 1311 and the third sub-coil 1331 can be electrically connected to the first part, the third part is electrically connected to the first part via the second part, and the second sub-coil 1312 and the fourth sub-coil 1332 can be electrically connected to the third part.
  • the current directions of the first sub-coil 1311 and the second sub-coil 1312 may be the same.
  • the first sub-coil 1311 and the second sub-coil 1312 may be arranged in series.
  • the first sub-coil 1311 and the second sub-coil 1312 may also be arranged in parallel, or powered separately.
  • the parameters such as the wire diameter and the number of turns of the first sub-coil 1311 and the second sub-coil 1312 may be set to the same value, or may also be set to different values.
  • the third sub-coil 1331 and the fourth sub-coil 1332 may be arranged in series. Alternatively, the third sub-coil 1331 and the fourth sub-coil 1332 may also be arranged in parallel, or powered separately.
  • the wire diameter, number of turns and other parameters of the third sub-coil 1331 and the fourth sub-coil 1332 may be set to the same value, or may be set to different values.
  • the first sub-coil 1311, the first anti-shake magnetic component 132, and the second sub-coil 1312 may be aligned in the third direction Z. That is, the center of the first sub-coil 1311, the center of the first anti-shake magnetic component 132, and the center of the second sub-coil 1312 are aligned or almost aligned in the third direction Z. At this time, the first sub-coil 1311 and the second sub-coil 1312 are aligned with the first anti-shake magnetic component 132.
  • the driving force between them is relatively large, and the arrangement space of the first sub-coil 1311, the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 and the second sub-coil 1312 on the XY plane is relatively small, which is conducive to the miniaturization of the motor 1.
  • the third sub-coil 1331, the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 and the fourth sub-coil 1332 can be designed the same or similarly, which will not be described in detail here.
  • FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the structure shown in FIG. 39 in other embodiments.
  • the arrangement positions of the first sub-coil 1311 and the second sub-coil 1312 may be different from the embodiment shown in FIG. 39.
  • the first sub-coil 1311 may be biased to one side relative to the first anti-shake magnetic part 132
  • the second sub-coil 1312 may be biased to the other side relative to the second anti-shake magnetic part 134.
  • the first sub-coil 1311, the second anti-shake magnetic part 134 and the second sub-coil 1312 are roughly arranged in the third direction Z, but the center of the first sub-coil 1311, the center of the first anti-shake magnetic part 132 and the center of the second sub-coil 1312 are in a non-aligned position relationship in the third direction Z, and the first sub-coil 1311 and the second sub-coil 1312 may be biased on both sides relative to the first anti-shake magnetic part 132 in the first direction X, so as to achieve the purpose of balancing the magnetic force.
  • the third sub-coil 1331, the second anti-shake magnetic part 134 and the fourth sub-coil 1332 may be designed the same or similarly, which will not be described here.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 may include a first sub-magnetic component 1321 and a second sub-magnetic component 1322 arranged relatively in a third direction Z.
  • the polarity directions of the first sub-magnetic component 1321 and the second sub-magnetic component 1322 are arranged in the same manner and both have two opposite polarity directions.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic conductive component 135 of the anti-shake driving mechanism 13 is located between the first sub-magnetic component 1321 and the second sub-magnetic component 1322.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic conductive component 135 includes a first portion 135a and a second portion 135b connected to the first portion 135a.
  • the first portion 135a is embedded in the first side portion 12b, and the second portion 135b is exposed relative to the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the first sub-magnetic component 1321 is fixed to one side surface of the second part 135b, and the second sub-magnetic component 1322 is fixed to the other side surface of the second part 135b. At this time, the first sub-magnetic component 1321, the first anti-shake magnetic conductive component 135 and the second sub-magnetic component 1322 are arranged in the third direction Z.
  • the first sub-magnetic component 1321 can be located between the first anti-shake magnetic conductive component 135 and the first sub-coil 1311
  • the second sub-magnetic component 1322 can be located between the first anti-shake magnetic conductive component 135 and the second sub-coil 1312.
  • the assembly structure of the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 and the first anti-shake magnetic conductive component 135 is simple, easy to implement, and low in cost.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic conductive part 135 and the anti-shake bracket 12 can be formed into an integrally formed structural part by in-mold injection molding, or can be assembled to form an integrated structure.
  • the anti-shake driving mechanism 13 may not be provided with the first anti-shake magnetic conductive part 135.
  • the first sub-magnetic part 1321 and the second sub-magnetic part 1322 can be directly fixed together and fixed to the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the first sub-magnetic component 1321 and the second sub-magnetic component 1322 may adopt a double magnet structure, a Halbach magnet array structure or a single magnet structure. The details can be found in the relevant description of the previous embodiment and will not be elaborated here.
  • FIG. 41 is a schematic diagram of a portion of the structure shown in FIG. 39 in other embodiments.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 may be composed of a first magnet 1323 and a second magnet 1324, the first magnet 1323 and the second magnet 1324 are arranged in the first direction X, and the polarity direction of the first magnet 1323 is opposite to the polarity direction of the second magnet 1324.
  • the polarity direction of the first magnet 1323 and the polarity direction of the second magnet 1324 are both perpendicular to the winding plane of the first sub-coil 1311 and the winding plane of the second sub-coil 1312.
  • the anti-shake driving mechanism 13 is not provided with a first anti-shake magnetic conductive component.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 may also be a Halbach magnet array.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic component 132 may include at least three magnets, and among the three adjacent magnets, the polarization directions of the two magnets located on the sides are opposite and perpendicular to the arrangement direction of the three magnets, and the polarization direction of the magnet located in the middle is from one magnet to another magnet.
  • the anti-shake drive mechanism 13 is not provided with a first anti-shake magnetic conductive component.
  • the first anti-shake magnetic member 132 may also be composed of a magnet, which includes two parts with opposite polarity directions.
  • the magnet may be made by a bipolar magnetization process.
  • the anti-shake driving mechanism 13 is not provided with a first anti-shake magnetic member.
  • the second anti-shake magnetic component 134 and the second anti-shake magnetic conductive component 136 can be designed the same or similarly with reference to the above embodiments (including the embodiment shown in FIG. 39 and the embodiment shown in FIG. 41 ), and will not be described in detail here.
  • the focus coil 221 of the motor 1 is fixed to the third side 12f of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the focus coil 221 can also be fixed to the fourth side 12g of the anti-shake bracket 12, and is arranged facing the focus magnetic member 222, and is used to drive the focus bracket 21 to move relative to the anti-shake bracket 12 along the third direction Z.
  • the fourth side 12g of the anti-shake bracket 12 can be provided with a through hole 126
  • the circuit board assembly 23 is installed on the fourth side 12g of the anti-shake bracket 12
  • the focus coil 221 can be fixed to the fourth side 12g through the circuit board, and the focus coil 221 is at least partially located in the through hole 126.
  • the anti-shake drive mechanism 13 of the motor 1 is arranged using the space on both sides of the anti-shake bracket 12, and the focus drive mechanism 22 is arranged using the space on the third side of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the remaining space on one side of the anti-shake bracket 12 may not be used to arrange the drive components, so that the motor 1 can ensure the focusing function and the anti-shake function while having a compact overall structure and high space utilization, which is conducive to miniaturization design.
  • the distance between the central axis of the focus bracket 21 and the outer side of the third side 12f may be smaller than the distance between the central axis of the focus bracket 21 and the outer side of the fourth side 12g.
  • the central axis of the focus bracket 21 and the outer side of the fourth side 12g may be smaller than the distance between the central axis of the focus bracket 21 and the outer side of the fourth side 12g.
  • the distance between the outer side of the third side 12f may also be equal to or greater than the distance between the central axis of the focus bracket 21 and the outer side of the fourth side 12g.
  • Fig. 42 is a schematic diagram of the partial structure of the motor 1 shown in Fig. 4.
  • This embodiment can include most of the technical solutions of the previous embodiment, and the following mainly describes the difference between the two, and most of the same contents of the two are not repeated.
  • a portion of the first sliding shaft 235a is disposed in the first sliding groove 211 of the focus bracket 21, and a portion of the second sliding shaft 235b is disposed in the second sliding groove 212 of the focus bracket 21. It can be understood that, through the cooperation between the first sliding shaft 235a and the first sliding groove 211, and the cooperation between the second sliding shaft 235b and the second sliding groove 212, the focus bracket 21 is limited in some directions on the X-Y plane, that is, the focus bracket 21 is prevented from moving in these directions, thereby ensuring the stability of the focus bracket 21.
  • the first sliding shaft 235a can be tightly matched with the focus bracket 21.
  • the second sliding shaft 235b can be loosely matched with the focus bracket 21.
  • the first sliding groove 211 is set to be "V" shaped.
  • the second sliding groove 212 is "L” shaped or “U” shaped. In this way, the first sliding shaft 235a is wrapped by the "V" shaped first sliding groove 211. It can be understood that by setting the first sliding shaft 235a to be tightly matched with the focus bracket 21 and the second sliding shaft 235b to be loosely matched with the focus bracket 21, the difficulty of assembling the focus bracket 21 and the anti-shake bracket 12 can be reduced.
  • the focus bracket 21 may also be connected to the first sliding shaft 235a and the second sliding shaft 235b in other ways.
  • a first through hole and a second through hole are provided on the focus bracket 21.
  • the first sliding shaft 235a and the second sliding shaft 235b are respectively sleeved on the first through hole and the second through hole.
  • FIG. 43 is a schematic diagram of a partial structure of the structure shown in FIG. 42 at another angle.
  • the number of contact positions between the focus bracket 21 and the first sliding shaft 235a is at least two, for example, including a first contact position M1 (the area surrounded by the dotted lines in FIG. 42 and FIG. 43) and a second contact position M2 (the area surrounded by the dotted lines in FIG. 42 and FIG. 43).
  • the second contact position M2 is arranged closer to the bottom surface of the base 11 relative to the first contact position M1, that is, the distance between the second contact position M2 and the bottom surface of the base 11 is smaller than the distance between the first contact position M1 and the bottom surface of the base 11.
  • the number of contact positions between the focus bracket 21 and the second sliding shaft 235b is at least one, for example, including a third contact position N1 (the area surrounded by the dotted line in Figures 42 and 43).
  • the second contact position M2 is arranged close to the bottom surface of the base 11, that is, the distance between the third contact position N1 and the bottom surface of the base 11 is greater than the distance between the second contact position M2 and the bottom surface of the base 11.
  • the focusing magnetic member 233 is disposed close to the first sliding shaft 235a relative to the second sliding shaft 235b. In other words, the distance between the focusing magnetic member 233 and the first sliding shaft 235a is smaller than the distance between the focusing magnetic member 233 and the second sliding shaft 235b.
  • the focusing magnetic member 233 and the focusing magnetic member 222 are provided on one side of the focusing bracket 21, and the focusing magnetic member 233 and the focusing magnetic member 222 are not provided on the other side of the focusing bracket 21, when the focusing bracket 21 moves along the third direction Z, the other side of the focusing bracket 21 is susceptible to being flipped about the flip axis due to gravity.
  • the first flip axis is the line between the bottom boundary line of the second contact position M2 and the bottom boundary line of the third contact position N1 (the P1-P2 line shown in FIGS.
  • the second flip axis is the line between the top boundary line of the first contact position M1 and the top boundary line of the third contact position N1 (the P3-P4 line shown in Figures 42 and 43).
  • the third flip axis is the line between the right boundary line of the first contact position M1 and the right boundary line of the second contact position M2 (the P5-P6 line shown in Figures 42 and 43).
  • the center position of the magnetic attraction force generated by the focusing magnetic suction member 233 and the focusing magnetic member 222 is set close to the first sliding shaft 235a.
  • the focusing bracket 21 is flipped with the first flip axis (P1-P2 line) as the axis or the second flip axis (P3-P4 line) as the axis, the vertical distance between the center position of the magnetic attraction force and the flip axis (P1-P2 line or P3-P4 line) (that is, the arm of the magnetic attraction force) will become longer, and the torque of the magnetic attraction force will increase.
  • the torque of the magnetic attraction force is equal to the product of the magnitude of the magnetic attraction force and the arm of the magnetic attraction force. Due to the increase in the torque of the magnetic attraction force, the ability of the focusing bracket 21 to resist the flipping of gravity is increased, that is, the stability of the focusing bracket 21 in the movement along the third direction Z is better.
  • the product of the vertical distance from the center of the magnetic attraction generated by the focus magnetic member 233 and the focus magnetic member 222 to the first flip axis (P1-P2 line) and the magnetic attraction is greater than the gravity moment of the focus mover.
  • the focus mover can be a related structure along the third direction Z, such as the focus bracket 21, the focus magnetic member 222, the lens 2 and the variable aperture 3.
  • the product of the vertical distance from the center position of the magnetic attraction force generated by the focusing magnetic element 233 and the focusing magnetic element 222 to the second flip axis (P3-P4 line) and the magnetic attraction force is greater than the gravity moment of the focusing actuator.
  • the product of the vertical distance from the center position of the magnetic attraction force generated by the focusing magnetic element 233 and the focusing magnetic element 222 to the third flip axis (P5-P6 line) and the magnetic attraction force is greater than the gravity moment of the focusing actuator.
  • the distance between the center of the focusing magnetic suction member 233 and the first sliding shaft 235a is a.
  • the distance between the first sliding shaft 235a and the second sliding shaft 235b is b.
  • a and b satisfy: 1/5b ⁇ a ⁇ 1/2b.
  • FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a part of the motor 1 shown in FIG. 5 in other embodiments.
  • the focusing magnetic member 233 may include a first focusing magnetic member 2331, a second focusing magnetic member 2332, and a third focusing magnetic member 2333.
  • the first focusing magnetic member 2331 includes a front surface and a top surface and a bottom surface arranged in a back direction, the top surface and the bottom surface may be arranged in a third direction Z, and the front surface is connected between the top surface and the bottom surface.
  • the focusing circuit board 231 may be fixed to the front surface of the first focusing magnetic member 2331.
  • the second focusing magnetic member 2332 is fixedly connected to the top surface of the first focusing magnetic member 2331. A portion of the second focusing magnetic member 2332 protrudes from the front of the first focusing magnetic member 2331.
  • the third focusing magnetic member 2333 is fixedly connected to the bottom surface of the first focusing magnetic member 2331. A portion of the third focusing magnetic member 2333 protrudes from the front of the first focusing magnetic member 2331. In this way, in the third direction Z, the second focusing magnetic member 2332 and the third focusing magnetic member 2333 can be fixedly connected to the first focusing magnetic member 2331 at intervals, and both protrude from one side of the first focusing magnetic member 2331.
  • the second focusing magnetic member 2332 can be fixedly connected to the first focusing magnetic member 2331 in a bending manner (the bending angle is not limited), or it can be fixedly connected to the first focusing magnetic member 2331 in a non-bending manner.
  • the second focus magnetic member 2332 can form an integral structure with the first focus magnetic member 2331.
  • the second focus magnetic member 2332 can also be fixedly connected to the first focus magnetic member 2331 by bonding, welding, etc.
  • the connection method of the third focus magnetic member 2333 and the first focus magnetic member 2331 can refer to the connection method of the second focus magnetic member 2332 and the first focus magnetic member 2331, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second focus magnetic member 2332 and the third focus magnetic member 2333 may also be fixedly connected to the front of the first focus magnetic member 2331 at intervals. In other embodiments, the focus magnetic member 233 may not include the second focus magnetic member 2332 and the third focus magnetic member 2333.
  • Figure 45 is a simplified schematic diagram of the forces acting on the focusing magnetic component 233 shown in Figure 44, the focusing magnetic component 222 shown in Figure 5, and the focusing bracket 21 when moving in the positive direction of the third direction Z.
  • Figure 46 is a simplified schematic diagram of the forces acting on the focusing magnetic component 233 shown in Figure 44, the focusing magnetic component 222 shown in Figure 5, and the focusing bracket 21 when moving in the negative direction of the third direction Z.
  • the focusing magnetic member 233 includes a first focusing magnetic member 2331, a second focusing magnetic member 2332, and a third focusing magnetic member 2333.
  • the second focusing magnetic member 2332 and the third focusing magnetic member 2333 are arranged on the first focusing magnetic member 2331 at intervals, and both protrude relative to the front of the first focusing magnetic member 2331.
  • the center of the focusing magnetic member 222 is located between the center of the second focusing magnetic member 2332 and the center of the third focusing magnetic member 2333.
  • the focusing magnetic component 233 can also adopt a structural design that covers the focusing circuit board 231.
  • the circuit board assembly 23 may not include a reinforcement part, and the reinforcement is provided by the focusing magnetic component 233.
  • the focusing magnetic component 233 may include a first focusing magnetic component 2331, a second focusing magnetic component 2332 and a third focusing magnetic component 2333, or it may include the first focusing magnetic component 2331 but not the second focusing magnetic component 2332 and the third focusing magnetic component 2333.
  • Figure 47 is a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 3 at the I-I line.
  • the focus sensor 234 may be disposed opposite to the focus magnetic member 222.
  • the focus sensor 234 may be used to detect the magnetic field strength when the focus magnetic member 222 is in different positions, so as to detect the position of the focus bracket 21.
  • the focus bracket 21 when the focus bracket 21 moves relative to the anti-shake bracket 12 along the third direction Z, the focus bracket 21 can drive the focus magnetic member 222 to move relative to the anti-shake bracket 12 along the third direction Z.
  • the focus sensor 234 can detect the magnetic field at the location of the focus magnetic member 222. In this way, when the focus sensor 234 detects the magnetic field strength of the focus magnetic part 222, the displacement of the focus bracket 21 can be determined by the magnetic field strength. It can be understood that through the cooperation between the focus sensor 234 and the focus magnetic part 222, the displacement of the focus bracket 21 relative to the anti-shake bracket 12 along the third direction Z can be accurately controlled, thereby realizing the closed-loop design of the lens 2 assembly.
  • the inner side of the focus bracket 21 may have a protrusion 213.
  • the protrusion 213 may be arranged opposite to a part of the structure of the lens barrel of the lens 2. In this way, by arranging a glue layer 214 between the protrusion 213 and the lens barrel of the lens 2, the lens 2 is stably fixedly connected to the focus bracket 21.
  • the protrusion 213 and the glue layer 214 may also form an interlocking structure, thereby further improving the connection stability between the focus bracket 21 and the lens 2.
  • the limiting bracket 30 is fixed on the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • a portion of the lens 2 is located on the side of the limiting bracket 30 facing the module circuit board.
  • a portion of the lens 2 passes through the limiting bracket 30 and is located on the side of the limiting bracket 30 away from the module circuit board. In this way, when the focus bracket 21 drives the lens 2 to move along the positive direction of the third direction Z, the limiting bracket 30 can limit the lens 2 in the third direction Z, that is, prevent the focus bracket 21 from sliding off the anti-shake bracket 12 along the third direction Z.
  • a buffer pad may be provided on the limit bracket 30.
  • the focus bracket 21 drives the lens 2 to move to the highest position along the positive direction of the third direction Z, the lens 2 may contact the buffer pad.
  • the buffer pad of this embodiment can prevent the lens 2 from being damaged or displaced due to direct collision between the lens 2 and the limit bracket 30.
  • the housing 40 may be fixed on the module circuit board 4.
  • the housing 40 covers the anti-shake driving module 10, the focus driving module 20, and a portion of the lens 2.
  • a portion of the lens 2 passes through the housing 40 and is located outside the housing 40.
  • the housing 40 may be used to protect the anti-shake driving module 10, the focus driving module 20, and the lens 2.
  • FIG. 48 is a schematic structural diagram of an embodiment of the base 11 shown in FIG. 5 at different angles.
  • the base 11 is provided with a plurality of connection terminals 50 , such as a first connection terminal 56 , a second connection terminal 57 , a third connection terminal 58 and a fourth connection terminal 59 .
  • a plurality of terminals 50 are fixed at intervals on the base 11.
  • the first terminal 56, the second terminal 57, the third terminal 58 and the fourth terminal 59 are all conductive traces.
  • the first terminal 56, the second terminal 57, the third terminal 58 and the fourth terminal 59 can be embedded in the base 11 at intervals.
  • the first terminal 56 may be embedded in the first corner 29a of the base 11.
  • the input end 561 of the first terminal 56 may be exposed relative to the top surface of the first corner 29a.
  • the output end 562 of the first terminal 56 may be exposed relative to the bottom surface of the first corner 29a.
  • the second terminal 57 may be embedded in the second corner 29b of the base 11.
  • the inlet end 571 of the second terminal 57 may be exposed relative to the top surface of the second corner 29b.
  • the outlet end 572 of the second terminal 57 may be exposed relative to the bottom surface of the second corner 29b.
  • the third terminal 58 may be embedded in the second corner portion 29b of the base 11 and spaced apart from the second terminal 57.
  • the inlet end 581 of the third terminal 58 may be exposed relative to the top surface of the second corner portion 29b and spaced apart from the inlet end 571 of the second terminal 57.
  • the outlet end 582 of the third terminal 58 may be exposed relative to the bottom surface of the second corner portion 29b and spaced apart from the outlet end 572 of the second terminal 57.
  • the fourth terminal 59 may be embedded in the third corner portion 29c of the base 11.
  • the input end 591 of the fourth terminal 59 may be exposed relative to the top surface of the third corner portion 29c.
  • the output end 592 of the fourth terminal 59 may be exposed relative to the bottom surface of the third corner portion 29c.
  • the second corner portion 29b may be located between the first corner portion 29a and the third corner portion 29c.
  • connection end 562 of the first terminal 56, the connection end 572 of the second terminal 57, the connection end 582 of the third terminal 58, and the connection end 592 of the fourth terminal 59 can be used to be electrically connected to the module circuit board 4 (see FIG. 47).
  • the external power supply can supply power to the first terminal 56, the second terminal 57, the third terminal 58, and the fourth terminal 59 through the module circuit board 4 (see FIG. 47).
  • first terminal 56, the second terminal 57, the third terminal 58 and the fourth terminal 59 may also be respectively formed of a flexible circuit board.
  • the first terminal 56, the second terminal 57, the third terminal 58 and the fourth terminal 59 may also be integrated into one flexible circuit board.
  • Figure 49 is a structural diagram of an embodiment of a line in which the focus drive chip 232 shown in Figure 5 is electrically connected to an external structure
  • Figure 50 is a partial structural diagram of an embodiment of the motor 1 shown in Figure 4.
  • the focus driving module 20 further includes a plurality of wires 28a and a plurality of conductive springs 28b.
  • the plurality of wires 28a include a first wire 281, a second wire 282, a third wire 283, and a fourth wire 284.
  • the plurality of conductive springs 28b include a first conductive spring 285, a second conductive spring 286, a third conductive spring 287, and a fourth conductive spring 288.
  • the plurality of conductive springs 28b may be an implementation structure of the plurality of first springs in FIG. 5 in the above embodiment.
  • a plurality of traces 28a are embedded in the anti-shake bracket 12 at intervals.
  • the first trace 281, the second trace 282, the third trace 283, and the fourth trace 284 are all conductive traces.
  • the first trace 281, the second trace 282, the third trace 283, and the fourth trace 284 can all be embedded in the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the positions of the first trace 281, the second trace 282, the third trace 283, and the fourth trace 284 are not specifically limited.
  • both the input end and the output end of each wire 28a are exposed relative to the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the output ends of the multiple wires 28a are electrically connected to multiple ports of the focus driving chip 232 through the focus circuit board 231 in a one-to-one correspondence.
  • the access end 281a of the first wiring 281 and the access end 281b of the first wiring 281 can be exposed relative to the surface of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the access end 281a of the first wiring 281 can be electrically connected to the SDA signal end of the focus driving chip 232 through the focus circuit board 231. It can be understood that the SDA signal end can be used to transmit the serial data (serial data, SDA) signal of the I2C signal.
  • the access end 282a of the second wiring 282 may be exposed relative to the surface of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the access end 282a of the second wiring 282 may be electrically connected to the SCL signal end of the focus driving chip 232 through the focus circuit board 231.
  • the output end 282b of the second wiring 282 may be exposed relative to the top surface of the anti-shake bracket 12, and may be spaced apart from the output end 281b of the first wiring 281. It is understood that the SCL signal end may be used to transmit the serial clock (serial cock, SCL) signal of the I2C signal.
  • the access end 283a of the third line 283 may be exposed relative to the surface of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the access end 283a of the third line 283 may be electrically connected to the positive power terminal of the focus driving chip 232 through the focus circuit board 231.
  • the outlet end 283b of the third line 283 may be exposed relative to the top surface of the anti-shake bracket 12, and is spaced apart from the outlet end 281b of the first line 281 and the outlet end 282b of the second line 282.
  • the access end 284a of the fourth line 284 may be exposed relative to the surface of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the access end 284a of the fourth line 284 may be electrically connected to the negative power supply terminal of the focus driving chip 232 through the focus circuit board 231.
  • the output end 284b of the fourth line 284 may be exposed relative to the top surface of the anti-shake bracket 12, and is spaced apart from the output end 281b of the first line 281, the output end 282b of the second line 282, and the output end 283b of the third line 283.
  • first line 281, the second line 282, the third line 283, and the fourth line 284 may also respectively adopt a flexible circuit board structure.
  • the first line 281, the second line 282, the third line 283, and the fourth line 284 may also integrate a flexible circuit board.
  • Figure 51 is a partial structural diagram of an embodiment of the motor 1 shown in Figure 4.
  • the first conductive spring 285, the second conductive spring 286, the third conductive spring 287 and the fourth conductive spring 288 can all be made of metal spring structures.
  • the first conductive spring 285, the second conductive spring 286, the third conductive spring 287 and the fourth conductive spring 288 can all be deformed under stress, that is, they have a stretchable effect.
  • a plurality of conductive springs 28b are fixed on the anti-shake bracket 12 at intervals.
  • the first conductive spring 285, the second conductive spring 286, the third conductive spring 287 and the fourth conductive spring 288 can be arranged on the top surface of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the first conductive spring 285, the second conductive spring 286, the third conductive spring 287 and the fourth conductive spring 288 can utilize the size space of the X-Y plane of the motor 1. In this way, the first conductive spring 285, the second conductive spring 286, the third conductive spring 287 and the fourth conductive spring 288 can be arranged in a larger area, thereby achieving a smaller motion reaction force.
  • the first conductive spring 285, the second conductive spring 286, the third conductive spring 287 and the fourth conductive spring 288 are deformed and generate elastic force.
  • the elastic force is opposite to the direction of movement, the elastic force is the motion reaction force.
  • the motion reaction force of the conductive spring 28b appears below, please refer to the explanation of the motion reaction force of the first conductive spring 285, the second conductive spring 286, the third conductive spring 287 and the fourth conductive spring 288, and the specific details will not be repeated.
  • first conductive spring 285 , the second conductive spring 286 , the third conductive spring 287 and the fourth conductive spring 288 may also be disposed on the peripheral side of the anti-shake bracket 12 .
  • the input ends of the plurality of conductive springs 28b are electrically connected to the output ends of the plurality of wires 28a one by one. At this time, the input ends of the plurality of conductive springs 28b are electrically connected to the plurality of ports of the focus driving chip 232 through the plurality of wires 28a and the focus circuit board 231 one by one.
  • the access end 285a of the first conductive spring 285 is electrically connected to the access end 281b of the first wiring 281.
  • the first conductive spring 285 can be electrically connected to the SDA signal end of the focus driver chip 232 through the first wiring 281 and the focus circuit board 231.
  • the access end 286a of the second conductive spring 286 is electrically connected to the access end 282b of the second wiring 282.
  • the second conductive spring 286 can be electrically connected to the SCL signal end of the focus driver chip 232 through the second wiring 282 and the focus circuit board 231.
  • the access end 287a of the third conductive spring 287 is electrically connected to the access end 283b of the third wiring 283.
  • the third conductive spring 287 can be electrically connected to the positive power supply terminal of the focus driver chip 232 through the third wiring 283 and the focus circuit board 231.
  • the access end 288a of the fourth conductive spring 288 is electrically connected to the access end 284b of the fourth wiring 284.
  • the fourth conductive spring 288 can be electrically connected to the negative power terminal of the focus driving chip 232 through the fourth wiring 284 and the focus circuit board 231 .
  • the access end 285a of the first conductive spring 285 can be fixedly connected to the connection end 281b of the first wiring 281 by welding or conductive adhesive.
  • the connection method of the access end 286a of the second conductive spring 286 and the connection end 282b of the second wiring 282, the connection method of the access end 287a of the third conductive spring 287 and the connection end 283b of the third wiring 283, and the connection method of the access end 288a of the fourth conductive spring 288 and the connection end 284b of the fourth wiring 284 can all refer to the connection method of the access end 285a of the first conductive spring 285 and the connection end 281b of the first wiring 281. The details will not be repeated here.
  • the connecting ends of the plurality of conductive springs 28 b are electrically connected to the plurality of connection terminals 50 in a one-to-one correspondence.
  • the connecting end 285b of the first conductive spring 285 is electrically connected to the connecting end 561 of the first wiring terminal 56.
  • the connecting end 286b of the second conductive spring 286 is electrically connected to the connecting end 571 of the second wiring terminal 57.
  • the connecting end 287b of the third conductive spring 287 is electrically connected to the connecting end 581 of the third wiring terminal 58.
  • the connecting end 288b of the fourth conductive spring 288 is electrically connected to the connecting end 591 of the fourth wiring terminal 59.
  • connection end 285b of the first conductive spring 285 can be fixedly connected to the access end 561 of the first wiring terminal 56 by welding or conductive adhesive.
  • the connection method of the connection end 286b of the second conductive spring 286 and the access end 571 of the second wiring terminal 57, the connection method of the connection end 287b of the third conductive spring 287 and the access end 581 of the third wiring terminal 58, and the connection method of the connection end 288b of the fourth conductive spring 288 and the access end 591 of the fourth wiring terminal 59 can all refer to the connection method of the connection end 285b of the first conductive spring 285 and the access end 561 of the first wiring terminal 56. The details are not repeated here.
  • the access end 281a of the first wiring 281 can be electrically connected to the SDA signal end of the focus driver chip 232 through the focus circuit board 231, the access end 285a of the first conductive spring 285 is electrically connected to the output end 281b of the first wiring 281, the output end 285b of the first conductive spring 285 is electrically connected to the access end 561 of the first wiring terminal 56, and the output end 562 of the first wiring terminal 56 is electrically connected to the module circuit board 4, the external power supply can input a signal to the SDA signal end of the focus driver chip 232 through the module circuit board 4, the first wiring terminal 56, the first conductive spring 285, the first wiring 281 and the focus circuit board 231.
  • the external power supply can input a signal to the SCL signal end of the focus driver chip 232 through the module circuit board 4, the second wiring terminal 57, the second conductive spring 286, the second wiring 282 and the focus circuit board 231.
  • the external power supply can be electrically connected to the positive power terminal of the focus driver chip 232 through the module circuit board 4, the third terminal 58, the third conductive spring 287, the third trace 283 and the focus circuit board 231.
  • the external power supply can be electrically connected to the negative power terminal of the focus driver chip 232 through the module circuit board 4, the fourth terminal 59, the fourth conductive spring 288, the fourth trace 284 and the focus circuit board 231.
  • this embodiment provides a first conductive spring 285 with elastic force to connect the first terminal 56 of the base 11 and the first trace 281 of the anti-shake bracket 12, so that when the distance between the anti-shake bracket 12 and the base 11 changes, the stretching of the first conductive spring 285 is used to offset this part of the distance change to ensure that the line is not easily disconnected, that is, to improve the stability of the circuit.
  • the second conductive spring 286, the second conductive spring 286 and the fourth conductive spring 288 all have similar functions. The details are not repeated here.
  • FIG. 52 is a structural diagram of another embodiment of a circuit in which the focus driving chip 232 shown in FIG. 5 is electrically connected to an external structure.
  • variable aperture 3 motor 1 may further include a plurality of conductive reeds 36a.
  • the plurality of conductive reeds 36a may be an implementation structure of the plurality of second reeds in the above embodiment.
  • the plurality of conductive reeds 36a include a first conductive reed 361, a second conductive reed 362, a third conductive reed 363, and a fourth conductive reed 364.
  • the first conductive spring 361, the second conductive spring 362, the third conductive spring 363 and the fourth conductive spring 364 can all adopt a metal spring structure.
  • the first conductive spring 361, the second conductive spring 362, the third conductive spring 363 and the fourth conductive spring 364 can all deform under stress, that is, they have a stretchable effect.
  • a plurality of conductive springs 36a are fixed at intervals on the focus bracket 21.
  • the first conductive spring 361, the second conductive spring 362, the third conductive spring 363 and the fourth conductive spring 364 can be arranged at intervals on the top surface of the focus bracket 21.
  • the access ends of the plurality of conductive springs 36 a are used to electrically connect to the plurality of ports of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 in a one-to-one correspondence.
  • the access end 3611 of the first conductive reed 361 can be electrically connected to the SDA signal end of the driver chip 31 of the variable aperture 3.
  • the access end 3611 of the first conductive reed 361 can be electrically connected to the SDA signal end of the driver chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through the circuit board and the wiring terminal of the variable aperture 3.
  • FIG52 schematically shows the driver chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through the dotted line. The actual shape, actual size, actual position and actual structure of the driver chip 31 are not limited by FIG52 and the following figures.
  • the access end 3621 of the second conductive spring 362 can be electrically connected to the SCL signal of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3.
  • the access end 3621 of the second conductive spring 362 can be electrically connected to the SCL signal end of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through the circuit board and the wiring terminal of the variable aperture 3.
  • the access end 3631 of the third conductive spring 363 can be electrically connected to the positive power terminal of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3. In one embodiment, the access end 3631 of the third conductive spring 363 can be electrically connected to the negative power terminal of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through the circuit board and the wiring terminal of the variable aperture 3.
  • the access end 3641 of the fourth conductive spring 364 can be electrically connected to the negative power terminal of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3.
  • the access end 3641 of the fourth conductive spring 364 can be electrically connected to the negative power terminal of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through the circuit board and the wiring terminal of the variable aperture 3.
  • the connecting ends of the plurality of conductive springs 36a are electrically connected to the plurality of wires 28a one by one.
  • the connecting ends of the plurality of conductive springs 36a are electrically connected to the plurality of conductive springs 28b one by one through the plurality of wires 28a.
  • the connecting end 3612 of the first conductive spring 361 is electrically connected to the first trace 281.
  • a portion of the middle portion of the first trace 281 may be exposed relative to the top surface of the anti-shake bracket 12.
  • the connecting end 3612 of the first conductive spring 361 is fixedly connected to the middle portion of the first trace 281 by welding or conductive adhesive.
  • the connecting end 3612 of the first conductive spring 361 may also be electrically connected to the first trace 281 by other means, and the position of the electrical connection is not specifically limited.
  • connection mode between the connection end 3622 of the second conductive spring 362 and the second wire 282, the connection mode between the connection end 3632 of the third conductive spring 363 and the third wire 283, and the connection mode between the connection end 3642 of the fourth conductive spring 364 and the fourth wire 284 can all refer to the connection mode between the connection end 3611 of the first conductive spring 361 and the first wire 281. The details will not be repeated here.
  • the external power supply can input a signal to the SDA signal end of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through the module circuit board 4, the first wiring terminal 56, the first conductive spring 285, the first wiring 281 and the first conductive spring 361.
  • the external power supply can input a signal to the SCL signal terminal of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through the module circuit board 4, the second terminal 57, the second conductive spring 286, the second wire 282 and the second conductive spring 362.
  • the external power supply can be connected to the positive power terminal of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through the module circuit board 4, the third terminal 58, the third conductive spring 287, the third wire 283 and the third conductive spring 363.
  • the external power supply can be electrically connected to the negative power terminal of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through the module circuit board 4, the third terminal 58, the third conductive spring 287, the third wire 283 and the fourth conductive spring 364.
  • the circuit of the SDA signal end of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3, the circuit of the SCL signal end of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3, the circuit of the positive power end of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3, and the circuit of the negative power end of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 reuse the circuit of the SDA signal end of the focus driving chip 232, the circuit of the SCL signal end of the focus driving chip 232, the circuit of the positive power end of the focus driving chip 232, and the circuit of the negative power end of the focus driving chip 232.
  • the circuit arrangement of the motor 1 is more simplified, and the structure of the motor 1 is simpler.
  • this embodiment provides a first conductive spring 361 with elastic force to connect the variable aperture 3 of the focus bracket 21 and the first trace 281 of the anti-shake bracket 12, so that when the distance between the focus bracket 21 and the anti-shake bracket 12 changes, the stretching of the first conductive spring 361 is used to offset this part of the distance change to ensure that the line is not easily disconnected, that is, to improve the stability of the circuit.
  • the second conductive spring 362, the second conductive spring 363 and the fourth conductive spring 364 also have similar functions. The details are not repeated here.
  • FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram of an embodiment of the electrical connection relationship among the controller 8 of the motor 1 , the focus driving chip 232 , and the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the camera module 100 includes a controller 8.
  • the controller 8 can be fixed on the module circuit board 4 (see FIG. 47 ) and electrically connected to the module circuit board 4.
  • the controller 8 is connected to the focus driving chip 232 in communication.
  • the controller 8 is also connected to the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 in communication.
  • the controller 8 can control the working conditions of the focus driving chip 232 and the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through address control.
  • the controller 8 controls the focus driving chip 232 to be in the working state, and at the same time controls the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 to be in the non-working state (for example, the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 cannot form a current loop).
  • the SDA signal can be transmitted through the module circuit board 4, the first terminal 56, the first conductive spring 285, the first trace 281, the focus The circuit board 231 transmits the SDA signal to the focus driver chip 232.
  • the SCL signal can be transmitted to the SCL signal end of the focus driver chip 232 through the module circuit board 4, the second terminal 57, the second conductive spring 286, the second wire 282 and the focus circuit board 231.
  • the external power supply can power the focus driver chip 232 through the module circuit board 4, the third terminal 58, the third conductive spring 287, the third wire 283, the fourth terminal 59, the fourth conductive spring 288, the fourth wire 284 and the focus circuit board 231.
  • the controller 8 controls the focus driver chip 232 to be in a non-working state (for example, the focus driver chip 232 cannot form a current loop), and simultaneously controls the driver chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 to be in a working state.
  • the SDA signal can be transmitted to the SDA signal end of the driver chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through the module circuit board 4, the first terminal 56, the first conductive spring 285, the first wiring 281 and the first conductive spring 361.
  • the SCL signal can be transmitted to the SCL signal end of the driver chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through the module circuit board 4, the second terminal 57, the second conductive spring 286, the second wiring 282 and the second conductive spring 362.
  • the external power supply can power the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through the module circuit board 4, the third terminal 58, the third conductive spring 287, the third wiring 283, the third conductive spring 363, the fourth terminal 59, the fourth conductive spring 288, the fourth wiring 284 and the fourth conductive spring 364.
  • Figure 54 is a partial exploded schematic diagram of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 3 in another embodiment
  • Figure 55 is a partial exploded schematic diagram of the motor 1 shown in Figure 54 in one embodiment
  • Figure 56 is a partial structural schematic diagram of the camera module 100 shown in Figure 3 in another embodiment.
  • the focus driving module 20 further includes a first flexible circuit board 24.
  • the first flexible circuit board 24 is electrically connected between the focus circuit board 231 and the module circuit board 4. Multiple ports of the focus driving chip 232 can be electrically connected to the module circuit board 4 through the focus circuit board 231 and the first flexible circuit board 24.
  • the controller 8 controls the focus driver chip 232 to be in the working state, and at the same time controls the driver chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 to be in the non-working state (for example, the driver chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 cannot form a current loop).
  • the SDA signal can be transmitted to the SDA signal end of the focus driver chip 232 through the module circuit board 4, the first flexible circuit board 24 and the focus circuit board 231.
  • the SCL signal can be transmitted to the SCL signal end of the focus driver chip 232 through the module circuit board 4, the first flexible circuit board 24 and the focus circuit board 231.
  • the external power supply can power the focus driver chip 232 through the module circuit board 4, the first flexible circuit board 24 and the focus circuit board 231.
  • a portion of the first flexible circuit board 24 may also be located between the fourth side 12g of the anti-shake bracket 12 and the base 11, that is, the first flexible circuit board 24 is located in a non-magnetic space, thereby reducing the impact on the magnetic components on the motor 1.
  • the position of the first flexible circuit board 24 is not specifically limited.
  • the first flexible circuit board 24 may also be located in the length space around the anti-shake bracket 12, so that the first flexible circuit board 24 has a longer cantilever, thereby achieving a smaller motion reaction force. It is understandable that when the anti-shake bracket 12 moves relative to the base 11 in the X-Y plane, the first flexible circuit board 24 bends or deforms, and generates a force in the opposite direction, which is also the motion reaction force. In this way, by increasing the length of the first flexible circuit board 24, the motion reaction force of the first flexible circuit board 24 is reduced. If the motion reaction force of the first flexible circuit board 24 appears below, please refer to the explanation of the motion reaction force of the first flexible circuit board 24, and the details will not be repeated.
  • variable aperture 3 further includes a second flexible circuit board 32.
  • One end of the second flexible circuit board 32 is electrically connected to multiple ports of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3, and the other end is electrically connected to the first flexible circuit board 24.
  • multiple ports of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 can be electrically connected to the module circuit board 4 through the second flexible circuit board 32 and the first flexible circuit board 24.
  • the second flexible circuit board 32 can form an integral structure with the first flexible circuit board 24.
  • the second flexible circuit board 32 and the first flexible circuit board 24 can be two independent circuit boards. Then, the two independent circuit boards are electrically connected through an electrical connector.
  • the controller 8 controls the focus driving chip 232 to be in a non-working state (for example, the focus driving chip 232 cannot form a current loop), and simultaneously controls the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 to be in a working state.
  • the SDA signal can be transmitted to the SDA signal end of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through the module circuit board 4, the first flexible circuit board 24 and the second flexible circuit board 32.
  • the SCL signal can be transmitted to the SCL signal end of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through the module circuit board 4, the first flexible circuit board 24 and the second flexible circuit board 32.
  • the external power supply can power the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 through the module circuit board 4, the first flexible circuit board 24 and the second flexible circuit board 32.
  • the circuit of the SDA signal end of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3, the circuit of the SCL signal end of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3, the circuit of the positive power end of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3, and the circuit of the negative power end of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 reuse the circuit of the SDA signal end of the focus driving chip 232, the circuit of the SCL signal end of the focus driving chip 232, and the circuit of the positive power end of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3.
  • the circuit of the positive power terminal of the focus driving chip 232 and the circuit of the negative power terminal of the focus driving chip 232 In this way, the circuit arrangement of the motor 1 is more simplified, and the structure of the motor 1 is simpler.
  • the second flexible circuit board 32 includes a first section 321, a second section 322 and a third section 323.
  • the second section 322 is connected between the first section 321 and the third section 323.
  • the first section 321 and the third section 323 are arranged opposite to each other.
  • the second section 322 is bent. In this way, the second flexible circuit board 32 is in an up-and-down folded state.
  • the first section 321 is electrically connected to multiple ports of the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3.
  • the third section 323 is electrically connected to the first flexible circuit board 24 through the focusing circuit board 231.
  • the bendability of the second flexible circuit board 32 is used to offset this distance change, so as to ensure that the circuit is not easily disconnected, that is, to improve the stability of the circuit.
  • the second flexible circuit board 32 can also achieve a very small motion reaction force.
  • the second flexible circuit board 32 is located at the top of the motor 1, and the projection of the second flexible circuit board 32 on the motor 1 is offset from the focusing magnet. In other words, the second flexible circuit board 32 utilizes the non-magnetic space at the top of the motor 1, thereby reducing the influence on the focusing magnet of the motor 1. In other embodiments, the position of the second flexible circuit board 32 is not specifically limited.
  • circuit configurations of the focus driving chip 232 and the driving chip 31 of the variable aperture 3 are not specifically limited.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Combustion & Propulsion (AREA)
  • Electromagnetism (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Adjustment Of Camera Lenses (AREA)

Abstract

一种马达（1）、摄像模组（100）以及电子设备（1000）。马达（1）的第一防抖磁性件（132）固定于防抖支架（12）的第一边部（12b），第二防抖磁性件（134）固定于防抖支架（12）的第二边部（12d）；第一防抖线圈（131）和第二防抖线圈（133）均固定于基座（11），且分别面向第一防抖磁性件（132）和第二防抖磁性件（134）设置，用于驱动防抖支架（12）相对基座（11）沿第一方向和/或第二方向运动；第一防抖磁性件（132）和第一防抖线圈（131）、第二防抖磁性件（134）和第二防抖线圈（133）均排布于第三方向，第三方向垂直于第一方向和第二方向。马达（1）的导向支架（14）呈 L 形，导向支架（14）的三个支撑部均位于防抖支架（12）与基座（11）之间，且与防抖支架（12）的三个角部一一对应设置，并通过支撑部（141、143、145）连接基座（11）和防抖支架（12）。

Description

马达、摄像模组以及电子设备
本申请要求于2023年02月15日提交中国专利局、申请号为202310146129.2、申请名称为“马达、摄像模组以及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中；本申请要求于2023年03月21日提交中国专利局、申请号为202310312152.4、申请名称为“马达、摄像模组以及电子设备”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及摄像技术领域，特别涉及一种马达、摄像模组以及电子设备。
背景技术
随着智能手机摄像头(camera)的拍照功能的日趋强大，光学防抖(optical image stabilizer，OIS)技术逐渐成为了手机摄像头的主要卖点与竞争力之一。光学防抖技术的作用是在拍照时对一定频率和幅度范围内的手机抖动进行实时检测反馈并进行反向补偿，由于该补偿通常是通过光学镜头(lens)矫正光路得到的，较之用软件算法提升增益而言，画质上的损失非常小，因而很好地保证了图像质量。
目前的光学防抖技术主要通过音圈马达(voice coil motor,VCM)实现，但是由于传统音圈马达的结构设计难以实现大行程的光学防抖，导致在一些应用场景中的图像质量受到影响，用户的拍摄体验不佳。
发明内容
本申请实施例的目的在于提供一种马达、摄像模组以及电子设备，该马达能够实现光学防抖的大行程设计，以获得更佳的拍摄体验。
第一方面，本申请提供一种马达，包括基座、防抖支架、第一防抖磁性件、第二防抖磁性件、第一防抖线圈以及第二防抖线圈，防抖支架包括依次连接的第一角部、第一边部、第二角部、第二边部以及第三角部，第一边部与第二边部呈夹角设置，第一防抖磁性件固定于第一边部，第二防抖磁性件固定于第二边部。
防抖支架活动连接基座，第一防抖线圈和第二防抖线圈均固定于基座，第一防抖线圈面向第一防抖磁性件设置，用于驱动防抖支架相对基座沿第一方向运动，第二防抖线圈面向第二防抖磁性件设置，用于驱动防抖支架相对基座沿第二方向运动，第二方向与第一方向相交。第一防抖磁性件和第一防抖线圈排布于第三方向，第二防抖磁性件和第二防抖线圈排布于第三方向，第三方向垂直于第一方向和第二方向。
马达还包括导向支架，导向支架呈L形，导向支架包括间隔设置的三个支撑部，三个支撑部均位于防抖支架与基座之间，且与第一角部、第二角部及第三角部一一对应设置，三个支撑部通过多个第一支撑件连接基座，并通过多个第二支撑件连接防抖支架，以使防抖支架与导向支架的相对运动方向不同于导向支架与基座的相对运动方向。
在本申请中，在第一防抖磁性件、第一防抖线圈、第二防抖磁性件以及第二防抖线圈的驱动下，防抖支架能够带动对焦支架及镜头，沿第一方向和/或第二方向相对基座运动，从而实现垂直于光轴的平面的运动，此时，马达可以实现摄像模组的光学防抖。而基于第一防抖磁性件、第一防抖线圈、第二防抖磁性件以及第二防抖线圈的排布位置等相关设计，在防抖支架相对基座沿第一方向运动的过程中，防抖支架的运动方向垂直于第一防抖磁性件与第一防抖线圈的磁间隙，在防抖支架相对基座沿第二方向运动的过程中，防抖支架的运动方向垂直于第二防抖磁性件与第二防抖线圈的磁间隙，上述磁间隙不受防抖支架的运动动作影响，因此能够避免因磁间隙增加而导致的驱动力快速下降的问题，从而确保马达的防抖驱动力较大，并且驱动力较为稳定，有利于马达的光学防抖功能的大行程设计，以获得更佳的拍摄体验。
此外，马达的防抖驱动机构的线圈和磁性件均大致排布于垂直于光轴的平面，通过增加磁性件宽度(也即第一防抖磁性件在第一方向的尺寸、第二防抖磁性件在第二方向上的尺寸)，即可以增加防抖支架在第一方向和/或第二方向上的运动行程，有利于在不增加马达高度的前提下实现光学防抖的大行程设计。此外，由于马达在光学防抖过程中的运动阻力主要是支撑件与配合结构件的滑动摩擦力，与运动行程无关，因此在进行大行程的光学防抖时，阻力不会明显增大，从而能够在无需大幅提高驱动力的前提下实现光学防抖的大行程设计。
在本申请中，导向支架采用L形，相较于框形结构，体积明显减小，能够节约两边空间，从而有利于 马达及摄像模组的小型化。并且，由于导向支架的三个支撑部对应于防抖支架的三个角部设置，第一防抖磁性件和第一防抖线圈位于第一支撑部与第二支撑部之间，第二防抖磁性件和第二防抖线圈位于第二支撑部与第三支撑部之间，因此导向支架能够在减小体积的情况下，保证防抖支架及基座的连接可靠性，能够实现稳定支撑和准确导向的作用，确保第一防抖磁性件与第一防抖线圈的相对位置及第二防抖磁性件与第二防抖线圈的相对位置的稳定性，使得马达的光学防抖运动平稳、可靠。
此外，马达通过导向支架和防抖支架的双层支架设计，每一层支架均与支撑件及相邻结构件配合构成一个方向的导向，两个方向的导向不会发生串扰，从而有利于实现光学防抖的精确导向。其中，基于多个第一支撑件的导向作用，导向支架和防抖支架能够一起相对基座沿第二方向移动，基于多个第二支撑件的导向作用，防抖支架能够相对导向支架沿第一方向运动，因此马达能够通过基座、第一支撑件、导向支架、第二支撑件及防抖支架的配合结构，在光学防抖过程中实现精确导向，从而解决传统马达进行光学防抖时出现镜头倾斜过大的问题。
其中，第一防抖磁性件可以具有两个方向相反的极性方向，第一防抖磁性件的极性方向与第一防抖线圈的绕线平面垂直设置。其中，第一防抖线圈的两段区域的线圈可以分别对应第一防抖磁性件的两个极性方向设置，两段区域的线圈内的电流流向相反。第一防抖磁性件朝向第一防抖线圈的一侧包括北极(N)和南极(S)，第一防抖磁性件背向对焦线圈的一侧对应地包括南极(S)和北极(N)。
示例性的，第二防抖磁性件可以具有两个方向相反的极性方向，第二防抖磁性件的极性方向与第二防抖线圈的绕线平面垂直设置。其中，第二防抖线圈的两段区域的线圈可以分别对应第二防抖磁性件的两个极性方向设置，两段区域的线圈内的电流流向相反。第二防抖磁性件朝向第二防抖线圈的一侧包括北极(N)和南极(S)，第二防抖磁性件背向对焦线圈的一侧对应地包括南极(S)和北极(N)。
一些可能的实施方式中，防抖支架还包括第三边部和第四边部，第三边部连接第三角部且与第一边部相对设置，第四边部连接第一角部且与第二边部相对设置。马达还包括对焦支架、对焦磁性件及对焦线圈，对焦支架位于防抖支架的内侧，对焦磁性件固定于对焦支架，对焦线圈固定于第三边部或第四边部，且面向对焦磁性件设置，用于驱动对焦支架相对防抖支架沿第三方向运动。
在本实施方式中，马达对应于防抖支架的第一边部和第二边部的两边位置排布防抖驱动机构和导向支架，对应于防抖支架的第三边部的一边位置用于排布对焦驱动机构，对应于防抖支架的第四边部的一边位置不排布驱动机构，因此马达能够充分利用其三边位置排布驱动机构，而剩余一边位置则尽量缩小体积，从而有利于马达整体的小型化设置。
其中，第一防抖磁性件、第二防抖磁性件及电路板组件分别固定于防抖支架的第一边部、第二边部及第三边部，且均采用至少部分嵌入的配合结构，使得多个部件之间的排布结构紧凑，空间利用率高。而防抖支架的第四边部在未设置其他配合部件的情况下，保持较小的尺寸，例如第四边部的宽度小于第一边部的宽度及第二边部的宽度，有利于减小防抖支架的体积。
在本实施方式中，在对焦支架相对防抖支架运动的过程中，对焦支架的运动方向垂直于对焦磁性件与对焦线圈的磁间隙，上述磁间隙不受对焦支架的运动动作影响，因此能够避免因磁间隙增加而导致的驱动力快速下降的问题，从而确保马达的对焦驱动力较大，并且驱动力较为稳定，有利于马达的对焦功能的大行程设计。
在本实施方式中，马达的对焦驱动机构和防抖驱动机构均为动磁设计，马达在第一方向、第二方向及第三方向上的驱动均由一组驱动件(包括线圈和磁性件)单独控制。其中，马达的对焦支架相对防抖支架沿第三方向移动、进行自动对焦的过程中，防抖支架与基座的相对位置不受影响，防抖驱动机构的磁间隙宽度不发生变化，同样的，防抖支架相对基座沿第一方向和/或第二方向移动、进行光学防抖的过程中，对焦支架随防抖支架移动，两者的相对位置不受影响，对焦驱动机构的磁间隙宽度不发生变化，因此马达的对焦驱动机构与防抖驱动机构实现解耦，运动过程中互不干扰，有利于确保马达的驱动精度。
此外，由于对焦支架位于防抖支架内侧，对焦线圈固定于防抖支架，对焦磁性件固定于对焦支架，因此马达的光学防抖的动子组件包裹着对焦的动子组件.对焦支架位于防抖支架的内侧。可以理解的是，当对焦支架位于防抖支架的内侧时，防抖支架可以围绕对焦支架设置。围绕可以是防抖支架环绕对焦支架一周设置，也可以是在防抖支架的一部分围绕对焦支架设置。在本实施方式中，防抖支架呈框状。此时，防抖支架环绕对焦支架设置。
其中，对焦线圈的导线所缠绕的平面(也即绕线平面)可以平行于第三方向。此时，对焦线圈呈竖直排布，从而使得对焦线圈可以在垂直于光轴的平面的占用的面积较小，进而有利于马达的小型化设置。对焦磁性件可以包括相反的两个极性方向，两个极性方向均垂直于第三方向。此时，对焦磁性件可以呈竖直 排布，从而减小对焦磁性件在-平面的占用空间，便于马达的小型化设计。
一些可能的实施方式中，第三边部或第四边部设有通孔，对焦线圈至少部分位于通孔，马达还包括对焦电路板，对焦线圈通过对焦电路板固定于防抖支架。此时，对焦线圈与防抖支架的结构排布紧凑，有利于提高空间利用率。
一些实施方式中，对焦支架的中心轴线与防抖支架的第四边部的外侧面的距离，可以小于对焦支架的中心轴线与防抖支架的第三边部的外侧面的距离。在本实施方式中，防抖支架在第三边部预留较多空间，以便于排布对焦线圈和对焦磁性件，在第四边部预留的空间较小，以减小体积，有利于马达的小型化设计。
一些可能的实施方式中，三个支撑部包括第一支撑部、第二支撑部及第三支撑部，导向支架还包括第一连接部和第二连接部，第一连接部连接第一支撑部与第二支撑部，第二连接部连接第二支撑部与第三支撑部。
其中，防抖支架的第一边部与导向支架的第一连接部对应设置，且对应基座的一边排布，防抖支架的第二边部与导向支架的第二连接部对应设置，且对应基座的另一边排布，因此防抖支架和导向支架排布紧凑，能够充分利用基座的三个角区和两个边区的空间进行排布，基座的另外两个边区的空间得以缩减，从而有利于马达的小型化设计。
其中，防抖支架具有活动空间，第一连接部位于第一边部及第一防抖磁性件背向活动空间的一侧，第二连接部位于第二边部及第二防抖磁性件背向活动空间的一侧。
在本实施方式中，防抖支架的第一连接部和第二连接部采用外绕排布方式，在第三方向上与防抖支架的第一边部及第二边部错开排布，从而有利于降低马达的高度，实现小型化。
一些可能的实施方式中，第一连接部包括第一本体和嵌设于第一本体的第一加强件，第一加强件的强度大于第一本体的强度。第一本体呈板状，第一本体于第三方向的尺寸大于第一本体于第一方向的尺寸；第一加强件呈板状，第一加强件于第三方向的尺寸小于第一加强件于第一方向的尺寸。
在本实施例中，第一加强件能够增加第一连接部的强度，使得第一支撑部与第二支撑部的相对位置更为稳定。此外，第一加强件的铺设平面与第一本体的竖立平面相交，甚至是大致垂直的，因此第一加强件对第一连接部的强度提升效果明显。
一些可能的实施方式中，马达还包括防抖磁吸件，防抖磁吸件固定于基座，且面向第一防抖磁性件和第二防抖磁性件设置，防抖磁吸件与第一防抖磁性件及第二防抖磁性件之间的磁性力，使得基座、第一支撑件、导向支架、第二支撑件及防抖支架之间保持接触。
在本实施方式中，通过第一防抖磁吸件与第一防抖磁性件之间的磁性力、第二防抖磁吸件与第二防抖磁性件之间的磁性力，使得防抖支架具有靠近基座的趋势，从而确保基座、第二支撑件、导向支架、第一支撑件及防抖支架之间保持接触，实现预紧。
一些可能的实施方式中，防抖磁吸件包括第一防抖磁吸件和第二防抖磁吸件。第一防抖磁吸件面向第一防抖磁性件设置，第一防抖磁吸件与第一角部之间的中心距离小于第一防抖磁吸件与第二角部之间的中心距离；第二防抖磁吸件面向第二防抖磁性件设置，第二防抖磁吸件与第三角部之间的中心距离小于第二防抖磁吸件与第二角部之间的中心距离。
在本实施方式中，由于第一防抖磁吸件位于第一支撑部与第二支撑部之间，第二防抖磁吸件位于第二支撑部与第三支撑部之间，因此第一防抖磁吸件与第一防抖磁性件之间的磁性力、第二防抖磁吸件与第二防抖磁性件之间的磁性力，能够更好地确保导向支架的三个支撑部通过支撑件与基座及防抖支架之间的连接，提高了马达的光学防抖过程的可靠性。其中，第一防抖磁吸件靠近第一角部设置，第二防抖磁吸件靠近第三角部设置，能够使导向支架的三个支撑部与基座及防抖支架之间的预紧力更为平衡、可靠。
一些可能的实施方式中，第一防抖磁吸件正对第一防抖磁性件设置，第一防抖磁吸件在第一方向上的尺寸大于第一防抖磁性件在第一方向上的尺寸。此时，第一防抖磁吸件在第一方向上相对第一防抖磁性件的两侧凸出，在马达的光学防抖过程中，第一防抖磁性件与第一防抖磁性件之间仍可保持正对关系或几乎正对的关系，从而保证磁吸力的稳定。
一些可能的实施方式中，第二防抖磁吸件正对第二防抖磁性件，第二防抖磁吸件在第二方向上的尺寸大于第二防抖磁性件在第二方向上的尺寸。此时，第二防抖磁吸件在第二方向上相对第二防抖磁性件的两侧凸出，在马达的光学防抖过程中，第二防抖磁性件与第二防抖磁性件之间仍可保持正对关系或几乎正对的关系，从而保证磁吸力的稳定。
一些可能的实施方式中，基座包括底板和侧框，侧框连接于底板的周缘，第一防抖线圈、第二防抖线圈及防抖磁吸件均固定于底板，防抖支架位于侧框的内侧，三个支撑部位于防抖支架与底板之间。
在本实施方式中，由于防抖支架在磁性力下具有靠近底板的趋势，因此可以确保导向支架、多个第一支撑件、防抖支架、多个第二支撑件及底板保持接触，从而在防抖支架相对基座运动的过程中实现精确导向，以提高光学防抖的可靠性和精确度。
一些可能的实施方式中，马达还包括多个第一簧片，多个第一簧片的排布平面垂直于第三方向，且位于防抖支架背向底板的一侧，部分第一簧片连接第一边部与侧框，另一部分第一簧片连接第二边部与侧框。其中，多个第一簧片可以排布于垂直于光轴的平面。多个第一簧片可以利用防抖支架的第一边部和第二边部上方的空间进行排布，以提高马达的空间利用率。其中，多个第一簧片用于在防抖支架相对基座运动、离开平衡位置时，提供使防抖支架移回平衡位置的弹性力。在一些实施方式中，第一簧片可以采用导电材料，以兼顾信号传输功能。
一些可能的实施方式中，基座包括底板、侧框以及顶板，顶板与底板相对设置，侧框连接于底板与顶板之间，第一防抖线圈和第二防抖线圈固定于底板，防抖磁吸件固定于顶板，防抖支架位于侧框的内侧，三个支撑部位于防抖支架与顶板之间。
在本实施方式中，由于防抖支架在磁性力下具有靠近顶板的趋势，因此可以确保顶板、多个第一支撑件、导向支架、多个第二支撑件及防抖之间保持接触，从而在防抖支架相对基座运动的过程中实现精确导向，以提高光学防抖的可靠性和精确度。其中，当防抖支架受到平行于第一支撑件的导向方向的驱动力时，防抖支架和导向支架一起相对基座沿第一支撑件的导向方向运动；当防抖支架受到平行于第二支撑件的导向方向的驱动力时，导向支架相对基座静止，防抖支架相对导向支架和基座沿第二支撑件的导向方向运动。
一些可能的实施方式中，马达还包括多个第一簧片，多个第一簧片的排布平面平行于第三方向，且位于防抖支架背向第一边部或第二边部的一侧，多个第一簧片连接防抖支架与底板。此时，多个第一簧片与基座及防抖支架的排布紧凑，有利于降低马达的高度，实现马达的小型化。
一些可能的实施方式中，顶板可以呈L形。例如，顶板可以包括彼此间隔的三个角区和连接三个角区的两个边区，两个边区呈夹角设置。顶板与导向支架对应设置。例如，顶板的三个角区与导向支架的三个支撑部对应设置，顶板的两个边区与导向支架的两个连接部对应设置。此时，顶板在配合其他结构实现导向作用的情况下，体积较小，从而有利于马达的小型化设计。可以理解的是，在其他一些实施方式中，顶板也可以呈框形。
一些可能的实施方式中，防抖磁吸件位于顶板背向导向支架的一侧，防抖磁吸件为一体结构件。此时，防抖磁吸件的数量少，并且组装方便。并且防抖磁吸件的面积大，能够确保防抖磁吸件与第一防抖磁性件及第二防抖磁性件之间的磁性力的大小和稳定性，以提高马达的光学防抖的可靠性。
一些可能的实施方式中，第一防抖线圈包括第一子线圈和第二子线圈，基座包括底板、侧框以及顶板，顶板与底板相对设置，侧框连接于底板与顶板之间，防抖支架位于侧框的内侧，第一子线圈固定于底板且面向第一防抖磁性件设置，第二子线圈固定于顶板且面向第一防抖磁性件设置。
在本实施方式中，马达的防抖驱动机构采用双线圈驱动方案，能够提供更大的驱动力，有利于提高驱动效率，增加光学防抖行程。此外，由于第一子线圈和第二子线圈分别位于第一防抖磁性件的相背两侧，第一子线圈和第二子线圈的驱动力的伴随力可以相互抵消，从而实现更准确的驱动动作。
一些可能的实施方式中，第一子线圈、第一防抖磁性件以及第二子线圈在第三方向上对齐设置。也即，第一子线圈的中心、第一防抖磁性件的中心以及第二子线圈的中心在第三方向上对齐或几乎对齐。此时，第一子线圈和第二子线圈与第一防抖磁性件之间的驱动力较大，并且第一子线圈、第一防抖磁性件以及第二子线圈在-平面上的排布空间较小，有利于马达的小型化。
一些可能的实施方式中，在第一方向上，第一子线圈相对第一防抖磁性件向一侧偏置，第二子线圈相对第二防抖磁性件向另一侧偏置。
此时，第一子线圈、第二防抖磁性件以及第二子线圈大致排布于第三方向，但第一子线圈的中心、第一防抖磁性件的中心以及第二子线圈的中心在第三方向上处于非对齐的位置关系，第一子线圈和第二子线圈可以相对第一防抖磁性件在第一方向上进行两侧偏置，从而达到均衡磁力的目的。
一些可能的实施方式中，第一防抖磁性件包括排布于第三方向的第一子磁性件和第二子磁性件，第一子磁性件与第二子磁性件的极性方向的排布一致，且均具有相反的两个极性方向；或者，第一防抖磁性件由第一磁石和第二磁石组成，第一磁石和第二磁石排布于第一方向，第一磁石的极性方向与第二磁石的极性方向相反；或者，第一防抖磁性件为海尔贝克磁石阵列；或者，第一防抖磁性件由一块磁石组成，且磁石包括极性方向相反的两个部分。
一些可能的实施方式中，第一防抖磁性件包括第一子磁性件和第二子磁性件，马达还包括第一防抖导 磁件，第一防抖导磁件包括第一部分和连接第一部分的第二部分，第一部分嵌入第一边部，第二部分相对防抖支架露出，第一子磁性件固定于第二部分的一侧表面，第二子磁性件固定于第二部分的另一侧表面，第一子磁性件、第一防抖导磁件及第二子磁性件排布于第三方向。在本实施方式中，第一防抖磁性件与第一防抖导磁件的组装结构简单、易实现，且成本低。
第二方面，本申请实施方式还提供一种摄像模组，包括镜头、图像传感器以及上述任一项的马达，镜头安装于马达，图像传感器位于镜头的出光侧。其中，摄像模组的马达能够实现大行程防抖，摄像模组具有较高的成像质量，以提高拍摄体验。
一些可能的实施方式中，摄像模组还包括可变光圈，可变光圈位于镜头的进光侧。可变光圈具有光圈孔，光圈孔的大小可以自动调节。光线可以经可变光圈的光圈孔进入镜头内。可变光圈用于实现进光量的调节，以使摄像模组可以在多种亮度条件下维持恒定的拍摄品质。
第三方面，本申请实施方式还提供一种电子设备，包括设备壳体以及上述任一项的摄像模组，摄像模组设于设备壳体。该电子设备的拍摄体验较佳。
附图说明
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例或背景技术中的技术方案，下面将对本申请实施例或背景技术中所需要使用的附图进行说明。
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备的结构示意图；
图2是图1所示的电子设备在一些实施例中沿A-A处剖开的部分截面结构示意图；
图3是图1所示的摄像模组的一些实施例中的结构示意图；
图4是图3所示的摄像模组的一些实施例中的部分分解示意图；
图5是图4所示马达在一些实施例中的结构示意图；
图6是图5所示基座在一些实施例中的结构示意图；
图7是图4所示马达的部分结构示意图一；
图8是图5所示导向支架的结构示意图；
图9是图8所示导向支架在另一角度的结构示意图；
图10是图9所示导向支架的部分结构示意图；
图11是图4所示马达的部分结构示意图二；
图12是图5所示防抖支架的结构示意图；
图13是图12所示防抖支架在另一角度的结构示意图；
图14是图5所示电路板组件的组装结构示意图；
图15是图4所示马达的部分结构示意图三；
图16是图4所示马达的部分结构示意图四；
图17是图5所示对焦支架的结构示意图；
图18是图4所示马达的部分结构示意图五；
图19是图4所示马达的部分结构示意图六；
图20是图4所示马达的部分结构示意图七；
图21是图4所示马达在另一角度的结构示意图；
图22是图21所示马达沿B-B处剖开的截面结构示意图；
图23是图22所示结构的部分结构示意图；
图24是图22所示第一防抖磁性件在一些实施例中的结构示意图；
图25是图21所示马达沿C-C处剖开的截面结构示意图；
图26是图21所示马达沿D-D处剖开的截面结构示意图；
图27是图21所示马达沿E-E处剖开的截面结构示意图；
图28是图4所示马达在另一些实施例中的部分结构示意图；
图29是图28所示结构的分解结构示意图；
图30是图4所示马达在另一些实施例中的部分结构示意图；
图31是图30所示结构的分解结构示意图；
图32是图31所示顶板在另一角度的结构示意图；
图33是图31所示防抖支架在另一角度的结构示意图；
图34是图30所示结构沿F-F处剖开的截面结构示意图；
图35是图30所示结构沿G-G处剖开的截面结构示意图；
图36是图4所示马达在另一些实施例中的部分结构示意图；
图37是图36所示结构的分解结构示意图；
图38是图37所示结构在另一角度的结构示意图；
图39是图36所示结构沿H-H剖开的截面结构示意图；
图40是图39所示结构在另一些实施例中的部分结构示意图；
图41是图39所示结构在另一些实施例中的部分结构示意图；
图42是图4所示的马达的部分结构的分解示意图；
图43是图42所示结构的部分结构在另一角度下的结构示意图；
图44是图5所示马达的部分结构在另一些实施例中的结构示意图；
图45是图44所示的对焦磁吸件与图5所示对焦磁性件以及对焦支架在沿第三方向的正方向移动的受力简化示意图；
图46是图44所示的对焦磁吸件与图5所示对焦磁性件以及对焦支架在沿第三方向的负方向移动的受力简化示意图；
图47是图3所示的摄像模组在I-I线处的一种实施例的部分剖面图；
图48是图5所示的基座在不同角度下的一种实施例的结构示意图；
图49是图5所示的对焦驱动芯片电连接至外部结构的线路的一种实施例的结构示意图；
图50是图4所示的马达的一种实施例的部分结构示意图；
图51是图4所示的马达的一种实施例的部分结构示意图；
图52是图5所示的对焦驱动芯片电连接至外部结构的线路的另一种实施例的结构示意图；
图53是图4所示的马达的控制器、对焦驱动芯片以及可变光圈的驱动芯片之间的电连接关系的一种实施例的示意图；
图54是图3所示的摄像模组在另一种实施例的部分分解示意图；
图55是图54所示的马达在一种实施例的部分分解示意图；
图56是图3所示的摄像模组在另一种实施例的部分结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面结合本申请实施例中的附图对本申请实施例进行描述。
在本申请实施例的描述中，需要说明的是，除非另有明确的规定和限定，术语“安装”、“连接”应做广义理解，例如，“连接”可以是可拆卸地连接，也可以是不可拆卸地连接；可以是直接连接，也可以通过中间媒介间接连接。其中，“固定连接”是指彼此连接且连接后的相对位置关系不变。“转动连接”是指彼此连接且连接后能够相对转动。“滑动连接”是指彼此连接且连接后能够相对滑动。本申请实施例中所提到的方位用语，例如，“上”、“下”、“内”、“外”、“顶”、“底”、“侧”等，仅是参考附图的方向，因此，使用的方位用语是为了更好、更清楚地说明及理解本申请实施例，而不是指示或暗指所指的装置或元件必须具有特定的方位、以特定的方位构造和操作，因此不能理解为对本申请实施例的限制。“多个”是指至少两个。在本申请实施例中，术语“第一”、“第二”、“第三”、“第四”仅用于描述目的，而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此，限定有“第一”、“第二”、“第三”、“第四”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括一个或者更多个该特征。
另外，在本申请实施例中，提到的相对位置关系的限定，例如平行、垂直、对齐等。这些限定，均是针对当前工艺水平而言的，而不是绝对严格的限定，允许存在少量偏差，近似于平行、近似于垂直、近似于对齐等均可以。例如，A与B平行，是指A与B之间平行或者近似于平行，A与B之间的夹角在0度至10度之间均可。例如，A与B垂直，是指A与B之间垂直或者近似于垂直，A与B之间的夹角在80度至100度之间均可。
请参阅图1，图1是本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备1000的结构示意图。
一些实施例中，电子设备1000可以为手机、平板电脑(tablet personal computer)、膝上型电脑(laptop computer)、个人数码助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、照相机、个人计算机、笔记本电脑、车载设备、可穿戴设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)眼镜、AR头盔、虚拟现实(virtual reality， VR)眼镜或者VR头盔等具有摄像功能的设备。图1所示实施例的电子设备1000以手机为例进行阐述。
请结合参阅图1和图2，图2是图1所示的电子设备1000在一些实施例中沿A-A处剖开的部分截面结构示意图。
一些实施例中，电子设备1000可以包括摄像模组100、设备壳体200以及屏幕300。其中，摄像模组100可以为后置摄像模组，也可以为前置摄像模组。需要说明的是，图1以及下文相关附图仅示意性的示出了电子设备1000包括的一些部件，这些部件的实际形状、实际大小、实际位置和实际构造不受图1以及下文各附图限定。此外，当电子设备1000为一些其他形态的设备时，电子设备1000也可以不包括屏幕300。
其中，设备壳体200可以包括边框201以及后盖202。后盖202固定于边框201。示例性的，后盖202可以通过粘胶、卡接等方式固定连接于边框201。后盖202也可以与边框201为一体成型结构，即后盖202与边框201为一个整体结构。
一些实施例中，屏幕300可以位于边框201远离后盖202的一侧。此时，屏幕300与后盖202可以分别位于边框201的两侧。屏幕300、边框201与后盖202共同围出电子设备1000的内部。电子设备1000的内部可以用于放置电子设备1000的器件，例如电池、受话器或者麦克风等。其中，屏幕300可以为平面屏，也可以为曲面屏。
示例性地，摄像模组100可以位于电子设备1000的内部。摄像模组100可以位于屏幕300朝向后盖202的一侧。后盖202可以开设有透光孔203。透光孔203的形状不仅限于附图1所示意的圆形。透光孔203将电子设备1000的内部连通至电子设备1000的外部。电子设备1000外部的光线可以通过透光孔203进入电子设备1000的内部。摄像模组100可以采集进入电子设备1000内部的光线。
请结合参阅图3和图4，图3是图1所示的摄像模组100的一些实施例中的结构示意图，图4是图3所示的摄像模组100的一些实施例中的部分分解示意图。
一些实施例中，摄像模组100可以包括马达1、镜头2、可变光圈3、模组电路板4、图像传感器5、滤光片支架6以及滤光片7。可以理解的是，图像传感器5也称为感光芯片或者感光元件。图像传感器5用于采集环境光线，并将环境光线所携带的图像信息转化为电信号。后文中为了便于描述，定义摄像模组100具有第一方向X、第二方向Y及第三方向Z，第一方向X可以为摄像模组100的宽度方向，第二方向Y可以为摄像模组100的长度方向，第二方向Y垂直于第一方向X，第三方向Z可以为摄像模组100的高度方向，第三方向Z垂直于第一方向X及第二方向Y。在其他实施方式中，摄像模组100的坐标系设置可以根据具体实际需要灵活设置。
示例性地，镜头2可以安装在马达1上。其中，镜头2的光轴方向与摄像模组100的第三方向Z相互平行。镜头2的光轴方向与摄像模组100的光轴方向是同一个方向。
其中，马达1可以通过控制镜头2沿第三方向Z运动，以实现自动对焦(auto focus，AF)。另外，马达1还可以通过控制镜头2沿垂直于第三方向Z的平面(也即X-Y平面)运动。这样，当摄像模组100采集环境光线时，若电子设备1000因外力作用而在X-Y平面产生抖动，则可以通过马达1控制镜头2在X-Y平面上的运动，抵消镜头2在X-Y平面产生的抖动行程，以避免或者减少镜头2因抖动而导致的位置偏置。换言之，本申请的摄像模组100可以通过马达1控制镜头2在X-Y平面上的运动，实现摄像模组100的光学图像防抖(optical image stabilization，OIS)，提高摄像模组100的成像质量。
示例性地，如图2所示，可变光圈3可以位于镜头2的入光侧。可变光圈3具有光圈孔3a，光圈孔3a的大小可以自动调节。光线可以经可变光圈3的光圈孔3a进入镜头2内。可变光圈3用于实现进光量的调节，以使摄像模组100可以在多种亮度条件下维持恒定的拍摄品质。
如图2和图4所示，在一些实施例中，图像传感器5可以固定于模组电路板4，且电连接于模组电路板4。此时，图像传感器5与模组电路板4之间可以相互传输信号。滤光片支架6固定连接模组电路板4。滤光片支架6与图像传感器5位于模组电路板4的同一侧。滤光片支架6设有透光孔6a。滤光片7固定连接于滤光片支架6。滤光片7可以位于透光孔6a内。滤光片7还与图像传感器5相对设置。滤光片7可以用于过滤进入图像传感器5之前的光线中的红外光或者蓝光等，从而保证图像传感器5具有较佳的成像质量。
如图2所示，在一些实施例中，马达1固定在模组电路板4上，且与图像传感器5位于模组电路板4的同一侧。在第三方向Z上，图像传感器5、滤光片7、镜头2以及可变光圈3依次排布。此时，图像传感器5位于镜头2的出光侧。滤光片7位于镜头2与图像传感器5之间。
可以理解的是，相较于将马达1固定在滤光片支架6的方案，本实施例通过将马达1固定在模组电路 板4上，可以避免马达1与滤光片支架6在第三方向Z的堆叠，也即马达1与滤光片支架6可以在X-Y平面错开设置，从而较大程度地降低摄像模组100的高度。
如图2所示，在一些实施例中，马达1具有避让孔1a。滤光片支架6的一部分可以穿过避让孔1a，进入驱动马达1的内部。此时，滤光片支架6的一部分位于驱动马达1的内部。这样，在第三方向Z上，滤光片支架6与驱动马达1具有重叠区域，从而可以较大程度地降低摄像模组100的高度。
请参阅图5，图5是图4所示马达1在一些实施例中的结构示意图。
在一些实施例中，马达1包括防抖驱动模块10和对焦驱动模块20，通过防抖驱动模块10驱动镜头2进行光学防抖，通过对焦驱动模块20驱动镜头2进行自动对焦，防抖驱动模块10和对焦驱动模块20形成一体式的马达。这样，相较于防抖驱动模块10和对焦驱动模块20分开设置的分体式马达，本实施例的马达1的体积更小，有利于实现马达1的小型化设置，从而有利于节省电子设备1000的内部空间。
示例性的，防抖驱动模块10可以包括基座11、防抖支架12、防抖驱动机构13、导向支架14、第一支撑件151、第二支撑件152、第一防抖磁吸件161、第二防抖磁吸件162、第一防抖传感器171以及第二防抖传感器172。其中，防抖驱动机构13包括第一防抖线圈131、第一防抖磁性件132、第二防抖线圈133以及第二防抖磁性件134。防抖驱动机构13还可以包括第一防抖导磁件135和第二防抖导磁件136。其中，第一防抖线圈131、第一防抖磁性件132以及第一防抖导磁件135对应设置，形成一组驱动机构，第二防抖线圈133、第二防抖磁性件134以及第二防抖导磁件136对应设置，形成另一组驱动机构。第一防抖磁吸件161、第二防抖磁吸件162均为马达1的防抖磁吸件16的一部分。第一支撑件151和第二支撑件152的数量均为多个，例如本实施例中以三个为例进行示意。
其中，对焦驱动模块20可以包括对焦支架21、对焦驱动机构22、电路板组件23、对焦磁吸件233以及第三支撑件235。示例性地，对焦驱动机构22可以包括对焦线圈221和对焦磁性件222。对焦驱动机构22还可以包括对焦导磁件223。电路板组件23包括对焦电路板231、对焦驱动芯片232、对焦传感器234以及补强件236。在其他实施方式中，电路板组件23也可以不包括对焦传感器234和/或补强件236。其中，第三支撑件235的数量可以为两个。
示例性的，马达1还可以包括多个第一簧片18和多个第二簧片19。其中，第一簧片18的数量可以为四个，或其他个数。第二簧片19的数量可以为四个，或其他个数。示例性的，马达1还可以包括限位支架30和外壳40。
可以理解的是，后文附图中，为简化示意，当附图中包括相同结构时，可以采用部分结构标号、部分结构不标号的方式，也可以采用全部结构均标号的方式。
请参阅图6，图6是图5所示基座11在一些实施例中的结构示意图。
一些实施例中，基座11可以包括底板111和侧框112，侧框112连接于底板111的周缘。其中，底板111可以大致呈框形，也即底板111的中部设有贯通孔。底板111可以包括依次连接的第一角区111a、第一边区111b、第二角区111c、第二边区111d以及第三角区111e，第一边区111b与第二边区111d呈夹角设置。底板111还可以包括第三边区111f和第四边区111g，第三边区111f连接第三角区111e且与第一边区111b相对设置，第四边区111g连接第一角区111a且与第二边区111d相对设置。示例性的，第一边区111b的宽度及第二边区111d的宽度，大于第三边区111f的宽度及第四边区111g的宽度。
示例性的，底板111可以具有上表面，底板111的上表面朝向侧框112设置。底板111可以设有多个第一凹槽1111，例如，第一凹槽1111的数量可以为三个，三个第一凹槽1111可以分别位于底板111的第一角区111a、第二角区111c以及第三角区111e。第一凹槽1111可以由底板111的上表面向底板111的内部凹陷，第一凹槽1111的延伸方向平行于第二方向Y。底板111可以包括多个第一挡块组，多个第一挡块组与多个第一凹槽1111一一对应设置。每个第一挡块组均包括两个凸设于底板111的上表面的第一挡块1112，两个第一挡块1112分别位于对应第一凹槽1111的两端。例如，两个第一挡块1112的排布方向可以平行于第一凹槽1111的延伸方向。
示例性的，底板111还可以包括多个第一定位柱1113和多个第二定位柱1114。多个第一定位柱1113位于底板111的第一边区111b，多个第一定位柱1113可以间隔设置，且相对底板111的上表面凸起。多个第二定位柱1114位于底板111的第二边区111d，多个第二定位柱1114可以间隔设置，且相对底板111的上表面凸起。
示例性的，基座11可以包括绝缘本体和导电件，导电件嵌设于绝缘本体中，可以形成多个传输通道，用于实现信号传输。其中，绝缘本体可以形成底板111和侧框112的主体，导电件可以排布于底板111和侧框112中。例如，导电件的部分端部可以由底板111的外周缘露出，导电件的部分端部可以由底板111 的上表面露出，导电件的部分端部可以由侧框112的上表面露出。
其中，基座11可以包括第一焊盘11151和第二焊盘11152，第一焊盘11151可以由导电件的部分端部形成，第二焊盘11152可以由导电件的另一部分端部形成。第一焊盘11151位于底板111的第一边区111b，且相对底板111的上表面露出，第一焊盘11151可以位于相邻的两个第一定位柱1113之间。第二焊盘11152位于底板111的第二边区111d，且相对底板111的上表面露出，第二焊盘11152可以位于相邻的两个第二定位柱1114之间。
示例性的，底板111还可以设有第一凹陷槽1116和第二凹陷槽1117，第一凹陷槽1116和第二凹陷槽1117可以均朝向底板111的上表面露出。示例性的，第一凹陷槽1116位于底板111的第一边区111b，第一凹陷槽1116可以位于相邻的两个第一定位柱1113之间。其中，相较于底板111的第二角区111c，第一凹陷槽1116更靠近底板111的第一角区111a。其中，第一凹陷槽1116与第一角区111a的中心距离小于第一凹陷槽1116与第二角区111c的中心距离。在本申请实施例中，两个结构的中心距离是指两个结构的中心之间的距离。示例性的，第二凹陷槽1117位于底板111的第二边区111d，第二凹陷槽1117可以位于相邻的两个第二定位柱1114之间。其中，相较于底板111的第二角区111c，第二凹陷槽1117更靠近底板111的第三角区111e。其中，第二凹陷槽1117与第三角区111e的中心距离小于第二凹陷槽1117与第二角区111c的中心距离。
示例性的，侧框112可以具有第一避让空间1121和第二避让空间1122，第一避让空间1121对应底板111的第一边区111b设置，第二避让空间1122对应底板111的第二边区111d设置。
请结合参阅图5至图7，图7是图4所示马达1的部分结构示意图一。
一些实施例中，多个第一支撑件151可以一一对应地安装于多个第一凹槽1111。其中，第一支撑件151的部分外表面相对底板111的上表面凸起。第一支撑件151位于对应的两个第一挡块1112之间，两个第一挡块1112用于对第一支撑件151进行限位，以使第一支撑件151与基座11之间的相对位置更为稳定，防止第一支撑件151脱出。一些实施例中，第一支撑件151也可以通过点胶或焊接等方式固定连接基座11。
示例性的，第一支撑件151可以采用滑轴结构，例如圆柱体结构。第一支撑件151安装于第一凹槽1111时，滑轴的轴向平行于第一凹槽1111的延伸方向。或者，第一支撑件151也可以采用滚珠结构，此时，第一支撑件151可以包括多个滚珠，第一支撑件151安装于第一凹槽1111时，多个滚珠的排布方向平行于第一凹槽1111的延伸方向。其中，多个第一支撑件151可以均采用滑轴结构，或者均采用滚珠结构，或者采用滑轴和滚珠的组合结构，本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。此时，多个第一支撑件151可以包括滑轴或滚珠中的至少一者。
在其他一些实施例中，多个第一支撑件151也可以与基座11共同形成一体成型的结构件，此处不进行赘述。
一些实施例中，第一防抖磁吸件161可以安装于第一凹陷槽1116，以固定于基座11。其中，第一防抖磁吸件161可以粘接于第一凹陷槽1116的底面槽壁。其中，第一防抖磁吸件161在第一方向X的尺寸可以大于其在第二方向Y的尺寸。例如，第一防抖磁吸件161可以大致呈长方形，第一防抖磁吸件161的长边可以平行于或大致平行于第一方向X，第一防抖磁吸件161的短边可以平行于或大致平行于第二方向Y。其中，第一防抖磁吸件161可以采用能够与磁铁或其他具有磁性的部件产生磁吸力的材料，例如铁磁性材料等。
第二防抖磁吸件162可以安装于第二凹陷槽1117，以固定于基座11。第二防抖磁吸件162可以粘接于第二凹陷槽1117的底面槽壁。其中，第二防抖磁吸件162在第二方向Y的尺寸可以大于其在第一方向X的尺寸。例如，第二防抖磁吸件162可以大致呈长方形，第二防抖磁吸件162的长边可以平行于或大致平行于第二方向Y，第二防抖磁吸件162的短边可以平行于或大致平行于第一方向X。其中，第二防抖磁吸件162可以采用能够与磁铁或其他具有磁性的部件产生磁吸力的材料，例如铁磁性材料等。
可以理解的是，在其他一些实施例中，第一防抖磁吸件161在第一方向X上的尺寸也可以小于或等于在第二方向Y上的尺寸，第二防抖磁吸件162在第二方向Y上的尺寸也可以小于或等于在第一方向X上的尺寸，第一防抖磁吸件161和第二防抖磁吸件162也可以有其他形状，本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
一些实施例中，第一防抖线圈131安装于底板111的第一边区111b，以固定于基座11。第一防抖线圈131可以环绕多个第一定位柱1113设置，多个第一定位柱1113用于对第一防抖线圈131进行限位。此时，第一防抖磁吸件161位于第一防抖线圈131靠近底板111的一侧。第二防抖线圈133安装于底板111的第二边区111d，以固定于基座11。第二防抖线圈133可以环绕多个第二定位柱1114设置，多个第二定位柱1114用于对第二防抖线圈133进行限位。此时，第二防抖磁吸件162位于第二防抖线圈133靠近底 板111的一侧。
一些实施例中，第一防抖传感器171固定于底板111的第一边区111b，且位于第一防抖线圈131的内侧。其中，第一防抖传感器171可以焊接第一焊盘11151，以实现结构固定及电连接。第一防抖传感器171用于实现位置检测，第一防抖传感器171可以采用霍尔(hall)传感器或隧道磁阻(tunnel magneto-resistance，TMR)传感器。
第二防抖传感器172固定于底板111的第二边区111d，且位于第二防抖线圈133的内侧。其中，第二防抖传感器172可以焊接第二焊盘11152，以实现结构固定及电连接。第二防抖传感器172用于实现位置检测，第二防抖传感器172可以采用霍尔(hall)传感器或隧道磁阻(tunnel magneto-resistance，TMR)传感器。
请结合参阅图8和图9，图8是图5所示导向支架14的结构示意图，图9是图8所示导向支架14在另一角度的结构示意图。
一些实施例中，导向支架14可以大致呈L形。导向支架14包括间隔设置的三个支撑部(141、143、145)和连接三个支撑部(141、143、145)的两个连接部(142、144)。其中，导向支架14可以包括第一支撑部141、第一连接部142、第二支撑部143、第二连接部144以及第三支撑部145。第一支撑部141、第二支撑部143以及第三支撑部145两两间隔设置，第一连接部142连接第一支撑部141与第二支撑部143，第二连接部144连接第二支撑部143与第三支撑部145。其中，第一连接部142与第二连接部144可以呈夹角设置。示例性的，第一连接部142与第二连接部144可以相互垂直或大致相互垂直设置。
示例性的，如图8所示，导向支架14可以设有多个第二凹槽146。其中，多个第二凹槽146朝向导向支架14的同一侧设置。第二凹槽146的数量可以为三个，三个第二凹槽146分别位于第一支撑部141、第二支撑部143、第三支撑部145，第二凹槽146的延伸方向可以平行于第一方向X。第二凹槽146可以由对应的支撑部的一侧表面向支撑部的内部凹陷。其中，导向支架14还可以包括多个第二挡块组，多个第二挡块组与多个第二凹槽146一一对应设置。每个第二挡块组均包括两个凸出设置的第二挡块147，两个第二挡块147分别位于对应第二凹槽146的两端。例如，两个第二挡块147的排布方向可以平行于第二凹槽146的延伸方向。
示例性的，如图8和图9所示，导向支架14还可以设有多个第一滑槽148，多个第一滑槽148背向多个第二凹槽146设置。第一滑槽148的数量可以为三个，三个第一滑槽148分别位于第一支撑部141、第二支撑部143以及第三支撑部145，第一滑槽148的延伸方向可以平行于第二方向Y。其中，第一滑槽148可以由对应的支撑部的另一侧表面向支撑部的内部凹陷。第一滑槽148可以在其延伸方向上贯穿对应的支撑部，形成贯穿槽。
示例性的，如图8和图9所示，第一支撑部141和第二支撑部143可以位于第一连接部142在第一方向X上的一侧，也即，第一连接部142避开第一支撑部141与第二支撑部143之间的正对空间设置，第一支撑部141、第一连接部142及第二支撑部143可以大致呈“U”形。第二支撑部143和第三支撑部145可以位于第二连接部144在第二方向Y上的一侧，也即，第二连接部144避开第二支撑部143与第三支撑部145之间的正对空间设置，第二支撑部143、第二连接部144及第三支撑部145可以大致呈“U”形。
请结合参阅图9和图10，图10是图9所示导向支架14的部分结构示意图。
一些实施例中，导向支架14包括本体和嵌设于本体内的加强件，加强件的强度大于本体的强度，以增加导向支架14的整体结构强度。例如，本体可以采用塑料材料，加强件可以采用金属材料等。
示例性的，第一连接部142包括第一本体142a和嵌设于第一本体142a的第一加强件142b，第一加强件142b的强度大于第一本体142a的强度。第一本体142a可以大致呈板状，第一本体142a于第三方向Z的尺寸大于第一本体142a于第一方向X的尺寸。此时，第一本体142a大致竖立于Y-Z平面设置。第一加强件142b可以大致呈板状，第一加强件142b于第三方向Z的尺寸小于第一加强件142b于第一方向X的尺寸。此时，第一加强件142b大致铺设于X-Y平面。在本实施例中，第一加强件142b能够增加第一连接部142的强度，使得第一支撑部141与第二支撑部143的相对位置更为稳定。此外，第一加强件142b的铺设平面与第一本体142a的竖立平面相交，甚至是大致垂直的，因此第一加强件142b对第一连接部142的强度提升效果明显。
其中，第二连接部144可以包括第二本体144a和嵌设于第二本体144a的第二加强件144b，第二加强件144b的强度大于第二本体144a的强度。第二本体144a可以大致呈板状，第二本体144a于第三方向Z的尺寸大于第二本体144a于第二方向Y的尺寸。此时，第二本体144a大致竖立于X-Z平面设置。第二加强件144b可以大致呈板状，第二加强件144b于第三方向Z的尺寸小于第一加强件142b于第二方向Y的 尺寸。此时，第一加强件142b大致铺设于X-Y平面。在本实施例中，第二加强件144b能够增加第二连接部144的强度，使得第二支撑部143与第三支撑部145的相对位置更为稳定。此外，第二加强件144b的铺设平面与第二本体144a的竖立平面相交，甚至是大致垂直的，因此第二加强件144b对第二连接部144的强度提升效果明显。
一些实施例中，加强件还可以包括第三加强件141b、第四加强件143b及第五加强件145b，第四加强件143b连接第一加强件142b与第二加强件144b，第四加强件143b可以位于第二支撑部143，第三加强件141b连接于第一加强件142b远离第二加强件144b的一端，第三加强件141b可以位于第一支撑部141，第五加强件145b连接于第二加强件144b远离第二加强件144b的一端，第五加强件145b可以位于第三支撑部145。此时，第三加强件141b、第一加强件142b、第四加强件143b、第二加强件144b及第五加强件145b依次连接，加强件为一体化结构。示例性的，加强件可以通过一体的金属件弯折或冲压形成。
在其他一些实施例中，第一加强件142b与第二加强件144b也可以没有连接关系，两者相互独立。第一加强件142b可以竖立于Y-Z平面，第二加强件144b可以竖立于X-Z平面。本申请实施例对加强件的具体结构不作严格限定。
请结合参阅图7至图9以及图11，图11是图4所示马达1的部分结构示意图二。
一些实施例中，导向支架14安装于基座11。其中，第一支撑部141对应底板111的第一角区111a设置，第二支撑部143对应底板111的第二角区111c设置，第三支撑部145对应底板111的第三角区111e设置。导向支架14的三个第一滑槽148与基座11的三个第一凹槽1111一一对应设置，安装于第一凹槽1111的第一支撑件151部分嵌入第一滑槽148中。此时，导向支架14的第一支撑部141、第二支撑部143及第三支撑部145通过多个第一支撑件151连接基座11。导向支架14通过多个第一支撑件151滑动连接基座11，两者的相对滑动方向平行于第一支撑件151的导向方向。其中，第一支撑件151采用滑轴结构时，滑轴的轴向即为第一支撑件151的导向方向；第一支撑件151采用滚珠结构时，多个滚珠的排布方向即为第一支撑件151的导向方向。
其中，第一支撑件151采用滑轴结构时，导向支架14与第一支撑件151相对运动时为线接触，能够避免因撞击压强过大而导致凹坑的风险，提高可靠性。一些实施例中，可以增加第一支撑件151与导向支架14的接触位置的宽度，以进一步提高结构配合的可靠性。
示例性的，如图7所示，多个第一支撑件151的导向方向平行于第二方向Y，因此导向支架14可以沿第二方向Y相对基座11滑动。在一些实施例中，第一支撑件151在其导向方向的垂直方向上，也可以对其他结构件起到限位作用。例如，第一支撑件151的设置使得导向支架14与基座11在第一方向X上相互限位。
示例性的，第一连接部142对应底板111的第一边区111b设置，第一连接部142可以位于第一防抖线圈131的远离底板111的第三边区111f的一侧。其中，第一连接部142可以至少部分位于基座11的侧框112的第一避让空间1121，以提高马达1的空间利用率。第二连接部144对应底板111的第二边区111d设置，第二连接部144可以位于第二防抖线圈133的远离底板111的第四边区111g的一侧。其中，第二连接部144可以至少部分位于基座11的侧框112的第二避让空间1122，以提高马达1的空间利用率。
一些实施例中，第一连接部142及第二连接部144与侧框112的配合，还可以兼顾活动避让和/或限位的需求。例如，导向支架14与基座11能够在第二方向Y上相对滑动，第一连接部142与侧框112之间预留出允许第一连接部142运动的空间，以实现活动避让。导向支架14与基座11能够在第一方向X上相互限位，第二连接部144可以与侧框112共同形成限位结构，例如第二连接部144与第二避让空间1122的壁面的配合结构。当然，导向支架14与基座11也可以通过其他结构实现第一方向X上的限位，本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
请结合参阅图7、图8以及图11，一些实施例中，多个第二支撑件152可以一一对应地安装于导向支架14的多个第二凹槽146。此时，三个第二支撑件152分别安装于导向支架14的第一支撑部141、第二支撑部143及第三支撑部145。其中，第二支撑件152的部分外表面相对导向支架14的对应支撑部的表面凸起。第二支撑件152位于对应的两个第二挡块147之间，两个第二挡块147用于对第二支撑件152进行限位，以使第二支撑件152与导向支架14之间的相对位置更为稳定，防止第二支撑件152脱出。一些实施例中，第二支撑件152也可以通过点胶或焊接等方式固定连接导向支架14。
示例性的，第二支撑件152可以采用滑轴结构，例如圆柱体结构。第二支撑件152安装于第二凹槽146时，滑轴的轴向平行于第二凹槽146的延伸方向。或者，第二支撑件152也可以采用滚珠结构，此时，第二支撑件152可以包括多个滚珠，第二支撑件152安装于第二凹槽146时，多个滚珠的排布方向平行于第 二凹槽146的延伸方向。或者，多个第二支撑件152采用滑轴和滚珠的组合结构，滑轴结构和滚珠结构可以参考前述结构，此处不进行赘述。此时，多个第二支撑件152可以包括滑轴或滚珠中的至少一者。
在其他一些实施例中，多个第二支撑件152也可以与导向支架14共同形成一体成型的结构件，此处不进行赘述。
请结合参阅图12和图13，图12是图5所示防抖支架12的结构示意图，图13是图12所示防抖支架12在另一角度的结构示意图。
一些实施例中，防抖支架12可以大致呈框形。例如，防抖支架12可以包括依次连接的第一角部12a、第一边部12b、第二角部12c、第二边部12d以及第三角部12e，第一边部12b与第二边部12d呈夹角设置。防抖支架12还包括第三边部12f和第四边部12g，第三边部12f连接第三角部12e且与第一边部12b相对设置，第四边部12g连接第一角部12a且与第二边部12d相对设置。一些实施例中，第一边部12b与第二边部12d可以相互垂直设置，第三边部12f可以平行于第一边部12b，第四边部12g可以平行于第二边部12d。
可以理解的是，第一边部12b与第二边部12d可以直接连接，也可以通过第二角部12c进行间接连接；第二角部12c连接第一边部12b和/或第二边部12d；第二边部12d与第三边部12f可以直接连接，也可以通过第三角部12e进行间接连接；第三角部12e连接第一边部12b和/或第二边部12d；第四边部12g与第一边部12b可以直接连接，也可以通过第一角部12a进行间接连接；第一角部12a连接第一边部12b和/或第二边部12d；第三边部12f与第四边部12g可以直接连接，也可以通过角部连接。本申请实施例对防抖支架12的具体结构不作严格限定。
示例性的，防抖支架12可以设有多个第二滑槽121，多个第二滑槽121朝向防抖支架12的同一侧设置。第二滑槽121的数量可以为三个，三个第二滑槽121分别位于第一角部12a、第二角部12c以及第三角部12e，第二滑槽121的延伸方向可以平行于第一方向X。
示例性的，第一边部12b设有第一安装槽122，第一安装槽122位于两个第二滑槽121之间；第二边部12d设有第二安装槽123，第二安装槽123位于两个第二滑槽121之间。第二安装槽123和第一安装槽122朝向防抖支架12的同一侧设置。
示例性的，防抖支架12具有活动空间124，活动空间124位于第一边部12b与第三边部12f之间，且位于第二边部12d与第四边部12g之间。也即，第一边部12b、第二边部12d、第三边部12f及第四边部12g环绕活动空间124设置。活动空间124在第三方向Z上贯穿防抖支架12。其中，防抖支架12还可以包括第一止位块125，第一止位块125位于活动空间124，且固定连接防抖支架12的多个边部。其中，第一止位块125的数量可以为多个，多个第一止位块125可以彼此间隔地排布于活动空间124的周侧。或者，第一止位块125的数量也可以为一个，本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
示例性的，防抖支架12的第三边部12f设有通孔126，通孔126在第一方向X上贯穿第三边部12f，通孔126连通活动空间124。其中，第三边部12f还可以设有第三安装槽127和第四安装槽128，第三安装槽127和第四安装槽128间隔设置，且分别位于通孔126的两侧。第三安装槽127和第四安装槽128的延伸方向可以平行于第三方向Z。
请结合参阅图5和图14，图14是图5所示电路板组件23的组装结构示意图。
一些实施例中，电路板组件23的对焦驱动芯片232和对焦传感器234均固定在对焦电路板231上，且均电连接对焦电路板231。对焦线圈221固定在对焦电路板231上，且电连接对焦电路板231。可以理解的是，对焦线圈221的输入端和输出端可以通过对焦电路板231与对焦驱动芯片232形成电流回路。此时，对焦驱动芯片232可以通过对焦电路板231控制对焦线圈221的电流情况(例如是否通电流或者通电时电流的大小等)。示例性地，对焦线圈221可以围绕对焦驱动芯片232和对焦传感器234设置。这样，对焦驱动芯片232和对焦传感器234可以有效地利用对焦线圈221的内侧空间，从而较大程度地提高马达1的空间利用率。
示例性的，对焦磁吸件233固定于对焦电路板231背向对焦线圈221的一侧。对焦磁吸件233采用能够与磁铁或其他具有磁性的部件产生磁吸力的材料，例如铁磁性材料等。补强件236固定于对焦电路板231背向对焦线圈221的一侧，用于增加电路板组件23的结构强度，降低对焦电路板231出现变形的风险。示例性的，补强件236与对焦磁吸件233可以固定于对焦电路板231的不同区域，对焦磁吸件233也可以用于增加电路板组件23的结构强度，降低对焦电路板231出现变形的风险。此时，补强件236可以与对焦磁吸件233拼接，或者彼此间隔设置。其中，补强件236与对焦磁吸件233拼接时，两者可以为一体成型的结构件，或者通过组装方式形成一体结构。
在另一些实施例中，补强件236固定于对焦电路板231背向对焦线圈221的一侧，补强件236面积较大，以使对焦电路板231获得整体补强。对焦磁吸件233固定于补强件236背向对焦电路板231的一侧。此时，对焦磁吸件233与补强件236呈堆叠状态。
请结合参阅图5、图12、图14以及图15，图15是图4所示马达1的部分结构示意图三。
一些实施例中，第一防抖磁性件132和第一防抖导磁件135可以安装于防抖支架12的第一边部12b的第一安装槽122，以固定于第一边部12b。其中，第一防抖磁性件132可以是磁铁或者其他具有磁性的部件，第一防抖导磁件135采用导磁材料，例如硅钢片以及各种铁制品和稀土元素形成的合金。其中，第一防抖导磁件135可以位于第一防抖磁性件132与第一安装槽122的底壁之间。其中，第一防抖导磁件135可以通过粘接等方式固定于防抖支架12，也可以通过模内注塑(insert-molding)等方式与防抖支架12形成一体成型的结构件。第一防抖磁性件132可以通过粘接等方式固定于第一防抖导磁件135。
示例性的，第二防抖磁性件134和第二防抖导磁件136可以安装于防抖支架12的第二边部12d的第二安装槽123，以固定于第二边部12d。其中，第二防抖磁性件134可以是磁铁或者其他具有磁性的部件，第二防抖导磁件136采用导磁材料，例如硅钢片以及各种铁制品和稀土元素形成的合金。其中，第二防抖导磁件136可以位于第二防抖磁性件134与第二安装槽123的底壁之间。其中，第二防抖导磁件136可以通过粘接等方式固定于防抖支架12，也可以通过模内注塑(insert-molding)等方式与防抖支架12形成一体成型的结构件。第二防抖磁性件134可以通过粘接等方式固定于第二防抖导磁件136。
示例性的，电路板组件23安装于防抖支架12的第三边部12f，以固定于防抖支架12。此时，对焦线圈221通过对焦电路板231固定于防抖支架12的第三边部12f。对焦线圈221至少部分位于通孔126，使得电路板组件23与防抖支架12的结构排布紧凑，有利于提高空间利用率。
在本实施例中，第一防抖磁性件132、第二防抖磁性件134及电路板组件23分别固定于防抖支架12的第一边部12b、第二边部12d及第三边部12f，且均采用至少部分嵌入的配合结构，使得多个部件之间的排布结构紧凑，空间利用率高。而防抖支架12的第四边部12g在未设置其他配合部件的情况下，保持较小的尺寸，例如第四边部12g的宽度小于第一边部12b的宽度及第二边部12d的宽度，有利于减小防抖支架12的体积。
请结合参阅图11、图15以及图16，图16是图4所示马达1的部分结构示意图四。
一些实施例中，防抖支架12活动连接基座11，防抖支架12位于导向支架14的三个支撑部(141、143、145)背向基座11的底板111的一侧，可以位于基座11的侧框112的内侧。其中，防抖支架12的第一角部12a对应导向支架14的第一支撑部141设置，防抖支架12的第二角部12c对应导向支架14的第二支撑部143设置，防抖支架12的第三角部12e对应导向支架14的第三支撑部145设置。此时，导向支架14的三个支撑部(141、143、145)位于防抖支架12与基座11之间，且与第一角部12a、第二角部12c及第三角部12e一一对应设置。第一防抖磁性件132与第一防抖线圈131相对设置，第二防抖磁性件134与第二防抖线圈133相对设置。
其中，防抖支架12的三个第二滑槽121与导向支架14的三个第二凹槽146一一对应设置，安装于第二凹槽146的第二支撑件152部分嵌入第二滑槽121中。此时，导向支架14的第一支撑部141、第二支撑部143及第三支撑部145通过多个第二支撑件152连接防抖支架12。防抖支架12通过多个第二支撑件152滑动连接导向支架14，两者的相对滑动方向平行于第二支撑件152的导向方向。其中，第二支撑件152采用滑轴结构时，滑轴的轴向即为第二支撑件152的导向方向；第二支撑件152采用滚珠结构时，多个滚珠的排布方向即为第二支撑件152的导向方向。
其中，第二支撑件152采用滑轴结构时，防抖支架12与第二支撑件152相对运动时为线接触，能够避免因撞击压强过大而导致凹坑的风险，提高可靠性。一些实施例中，可以增加第二支撑件152与防抖支架12的接触位置的宽度，以进一步提高结构配合的可靠性。
示例性的，如图11所示，多个第二支撑件152的导向方向平行于第一方向X，因此防抖支架12可以沿第一方向X相对导向支架14滑动。在一些实施例中，第二支撑件152在其导向方向的垂直方向上，也可以对其他结构件起到限位作用。例如，第二支撑件152的设置使得防抖支架12与导向支架14在第二方向Y上相互限位。在其他一些实施例中，防抖支架12与导向支架14之间也可以设置其他限位结构，以实现两者在第二方向Y上的限位，本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
在本申请实施例中，多个第一支撑件151的导向方向与多个第二支撑件152的导向方向不同，使得防抖支架12与导向支架14的相对运动方向不同于导向支架14与基座11的相对运动方向，防抖支架12相对于基座11能够实现X-Y平面上的运动。其中，多个第一支撑件151的导向方向与多个第二支撑件152 的导向方向可以是相互垂直的，也可以是相交但不垂直的，本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
在前文实施例中，多个第一支撑件151的导向方向平行于第一方向X，多个第二支撑件152的导向方向平行于第二方向Y，使得防抖支架12能够相对导向支架14沿第二方向Y运动，防抖支架12和导向支架14能够一起相对于基座11能够沿第一方向X运动。
在其他一些实施例中，多个第一支撑件151的导向方向也可以平行于第二方向Y，多个第二支撑件152的导向方向也可以平行于第一方向X，使得防抖支架12能够相对导向支架14沿第一方向X运动，防抖支架12和导向支架14能够一起相对于基座11能够沿第二方向Y运动。此时，基座11的多个第一凹槽1111的延伸方向、导向支架14的多个第一滑槽148的方向跟随多个第一支撑件151的导向方向变化，也即变化为平行于第二方向Y；导向支架14的多个第二凹槽146的延伸方向、防抖支架12的多个第二滑槽121的方向跟随多个第二支撑件152的导向方向变化，也即变化为平行于第一方向X。
如图16所示，一些实施例中，防抖支架12的第一边部12b与导向支架14的第一连接部142对应设置，且对应基座11的一边排布，防抖支架12的第二边部12d与导向支架14的第二连接部144对应设置，且对应基座11的另一边排布，因此防抖支架12和导向支架14排布紧凑，能够充分利用基座11的三个角区和两个边区的空间进行排布，基座11的另外两个边区的空间得以缩减，从而有利于马达1的小型化设计。
如图15和图16所示，一些实施例中，第一连接部142位于第一边部12b及第一防抖磁性件132背向活动空间124的一侧，第二连接部144位于第二边部12d及第二防抖磁性件134背向活动空间124的一侧。在本实施例中，防抖支架12的第一连接部142和第二连接部144采用外绕排布方式，在第三方向Z上与防抖支架12的第一边部12b及第二边部12d错开排布，从而有利于降低马达1的高度，实现小型化。
请参阅图17，图17是图5所示对焦支架21的结构示意图。
一些实施例中，对焦支架21可以大体呈框形，对焦支架21具有安装空间215。对焦支架21设有第五安装槽216、第一滑动槽211及第二滑动槽212。第五安装槽216背向安装空间215设置。例如，第一滑动槽211和第二滑动槽212间隔设置，均背向安装空间215设置且分别位于第五安装槽216的两侧。第一滑动槽211及第二滑动槽212的延伸方向可以平行于第三方向Z。
请结合参阅图5、图17以及图18，图18是图4所示马达1的部分结构示意图五。
一些实施例中，对焦磁性件222和对焦导磁件223可以安装于对焦支架21的第五安装槽216，以固定于对焦支架21。其中，对焦导磁件223的主要部分可以位于对焦磁性件222与第五安装槽216的底壁之间。其中，对焦导磁件223可以通过粘接等方式固定于对焦支架21，也可以通过模内注塑(insert-molding)等方式与对焦支架21形成一体成型的结构件。对焦磁性件222可以通过粘接等方式固定于对焦导磁件223。
请结合参阅图16、图18以及图19，图19是图4所示马达1的部分结构示意图六。
一些实施例中，对焦支架21安装于防抖支架12的内侧，对焦磁性件222与对焦线圈221相对设置。对焦支架21的第一滑动槽211与防抖支架12的第三安装槽127对应设置，对焦支架21的第二滑动槽212与防抖支架12的第四安装槽128对应设置。其中一个第三支撑件235安装于第三安装槽127，且至少部分嵌入第一滑动槽211中；另一个第三支撑件235安装于第四安装槽128，且部分嵌入第二滑动槽212中。第三支撑件235可以通过粘接等方式固定连接防抖支架12。对焦支架21通过第三支撑件235滑动连接防抖支架12，两者的相对滑动方向平行于第三支撑件235的导向方向，也即第三方向Z。其中，第三支撑件235采用滑轴结构时，滑轴的轴向即为第三支撑件235的导向方向；第三支撑件235采用滚珠结构时，多个滚珠的排布方向即为第三支撑件235的导向方向。示例性的，第三支撑件235可以包括第一滑轴235a和第二滑轴235b，第一滑轴235a安装于第三安装槽127，第二滑轴235b安装于第四安装槽128。
示例性的，对焦支架21的安装空间215用于安装镜头2，对焦支架21的中心轴线平行于镜头2的光轴。在一些实施例中，对焦支架21的中心轴线与防抖支架12的第四边部12g的外侧面的距离，可以小于对焦支架21的中心轴线与防抖支架12的第三边部12f的外侧面的距离。在本实施例中，防抖支架12在第三边部12f预留较多空间，以便于排布对焦线圈221和对焦磁性件222，在第四边部12g预留的空间较小，以减小体积，有利于马达1的小型化设计。当然，在其他一些实施例中，对焦支架21的中心轴线与防抖支架12的第四边部12g的外侧面的距离，也可以等于或大于对焦支架21的中心轴线与防抖支架12的第三边部12f的外侧面的距离。
请参阅图20，图20是图4所示马达1的部分结构示意图七。
一些实施例中，多个第一簧片18的排布平面可以垂直于第三方向Z，且位于防抖支架12背向底板111的一侧。也即，多个第一簧片18可以排布于X-Y平面。部分第一簧片18连接第一边部12b与基座11的 侧框112，另一部分第一簧片18连接第二边部12d与基座11的侧框112。其中，多个第一簧片18可以利用防抖支架12的第一边部12b和第二边部12d上方的空间进行排布，以提高马达1的空间利用率。其中，多个第一簧片18用于在防抖支架12相对基座11运动、离开平衡位置时，提供使防抖支架12移回平衡位置的弹性力。在一些实施例中，第一簧片18可以采用导电材料，以兼顾信号传输功能。
一些实施例中，多个第二簧片19的排布平面可以垂直于第三方向Z，且位于对焦支架21背向底板111的一侧。也即，多个第二簧片19可以排布于X-Y平面。多个第二簧片19连接防抖支架12与对焦支架21。其中，多个第二簧片19用于在对焦支架21相对防抖支架12运动、离开平衡位置时，提供使对焦支架21移回平衡位置的弹性力。在一些实施例中，第二簧片19可以采用导电材料，以兼顾信号传输功能。
一些实施例中，限位支架30固定于防抖支架12背向底板111的一侧。其中，限位支架30包括第二止位块301，第二止位块301正对对焦支架21设置。第二止位块301的数量可以为一个或多个，多个第二止位块301可以彼此间隔对应对焦支架21的周侧排布。结合参阅图16和图20，防抖支架12的第一止位块125和限位支架30的第二止位块301可以配合，在第三方向Z上限制对焦支架21的运动行程，以防止对焦支架21脱离限位支架30，也使得对焦支架21与限位支架30的相对运动动作更为可靠。
请参阅图21，图21是图4所示马达1在另一角度的结构示意图。
一些实施例中，外壳40与基座11组装配合，外壳40罩设在基座11上，外壳40可以包覆基座11的侧框112(可结合参考图20)，外壳40与基座11配合，共同封装和保护马达1的内部结构。其中，外壳40设有贯穿孔，马达1的部分结构经该贯穿孔露出，例如对焦支架21的部分结构露出。
请参阅图22，图22是图21所示马达1沿B-B处剖开的截面结构示意图。
一些实施例中，对焦线圈221固定于防抖支架12，对焦磁性件222固定于对焦支架21，对焦线圈221面向对焦磁性件222设置，用于驱动对焦支架21相对防抖支架12沿第三方向Z运动。当对焦支架21相对防抖支架12沿第三方向Z运动时，对焦支架21可以带动安装于其上的镜头2沿第三方向Z运动，此时，马达1可以实现摄像模组100的自动对焦。其中，对焦线圈221面向对焦磁性件222设置，是指对焦线圈221的绕线平面面向对焦磁性件222。示例性的，固定于的对焦电路板231的对焦传感器234(可参阅图14)可以用于检测对焦支架21在第三方向Z上的位置变化。
在本实施例中，在对焦支架21相对防抖支架12运动的过程中，对焦支架21的运动方向垂直于对焦磁性件222与对焦线圈221的磁间隙，上述磁间隙不受对焦支架21的运动动作影响，因此能够避免因磁间隙增加而导致的驱动力快速下降的问题，从而确保马达1的对焦驱动力较大，并且驱动力较为稳定，有利于马达1的对焦功能的大行程设计。
其中，对焦磁性件222可以具有两个方向相反的极性方向，对焦磁性件222的极性方向与对焦线圈221的绕线平面垂直设置。其中，对焦线圈221的两段区域的线圈可以分别对应对焦磁性件222的两个极性方向设置，两段区域的线圈内的电流流向相反。可以理解的，极性方向可以是北极(N)朝向南极(S)的方向，或者南极(S)朝向北极(N)的方向。此时，对焦磁性件222朝向对焦线圈221的一侧包括北极(N)和南极(S)，对焦磁性件222背向对焦线圈221的一侧对应地包括南极(S)和北极(N)。
示例性的，对焦磁性件222可以包括一个或多个磁石，对焦磁性件222的实现结构可以有多种。例如，一些实施例中，对焦磁性件222可以采用双磁石方案，例如由两块磁石组成，两块磁石排布于第三方向Z，且极性方向相反。另一些实施例中，对焦磁性件222为海尔贝克磁石阵列。另一些实施例中，对焦磁性件222可以采用单磁石方案，例如由一块磁石组成，该磁石包括极性方向相反的两个部分。该磁石可以采用双极充磁工艺制成。
一些实施例中，结合图19和图22所示，对焦磁性件222与对焦导磁件223之间形成磁吸力，使得对焦支架21具有靠近防抖支架12的第三边部12f的趋势，对焦支架21、第三支撑件235及防抖支架12保持接触，第三支撑件235能够更好地引导对焦支架21沿第三方向Z相对防抖支架12运动。
请结合参阅图22和图23，图23是图22所示结构的部分结构示意图。
一些实施例中，第一防抖磁性件132固定于防抖支架12，第一防抖线圈131固定于基座11，第一防抖线圈131面向第一防抖磁性件132设置，用于驱动防抖支架12相对基座11沿第一方向X运动，第一防抖磁性件132和第一防抖线圈131排布于第三方向Z。其中，第一防抖线圈131面向第一防抖磁性件132设置，是指第一防抖线圈131的绕线平面面向第一防抖磁性件132。例如，第一防抖线圈131的绕线平面可以平行于X-Y平面设置。示例性的，固定于的基座11的底板111的第一防抖传感器171(可参阅图7)可以用于检测防抖支架12在第一方向X上的位置变化。
在本实施例中，在防抖支架12相对基座11沿第一方向X运动的过程中，防抖支架12的运动方向垂 直于第一防抖磁性件132与第一防抖线圈131的磁间隙，上述磁间隙不受防抖支架12的运动动作影响，因此能够避免因磁间隙增加而导致的驱动力快速下降的问题，从而确保马达1的防抖驱动力较大，并且驱动力较为稳定，有利于马达1的光学防抖功能的大行程设计。
其中，第一防抖磁性件132可以具有两个方向相反的极性方向(如图23中箭头所示)，第一防抖磁性件132的极性方向与第一防抖线圈131的绕线平面垂直设置。其中，第一防抖线圈131的两段区域的线圈可以分别对应第一防抖磁性件132的两个极性方向设置，两段区域的线圈内的电流流向相反。第一防抖磁性件132朝向第一防抖线圈131的一侧包括北极(N)和南极(S)，第一防抖磁性件132背向对焦线圈221的一侧对应地包括南极(S)和北极(N)。
示例性的，第一防抖磁性件132可以包括一个或多个磁石，第一防抖磁性件132的实现结构可以有多种。例如，一些实施例中，如图23所示，第一防抖磁性件132可以采用双磁石结构，例如由两块磁石组成，两块磁石排布于第一方向X，且极性方向相反。另一些实施例中，如图24所示，图24是图22所示第一防抖磁性件132在一些实施例中的结构示意图，第一防抖磁性件132为海尔贝克磁石阵列。例如，第一防抖磁性件132可以包括至少三块磁石，相邻的三块磁石中，位于边上的两块磁石的极化方向相反，且垂直于三块磁石的排布方向，位于中间的磁石的极化方向由其中一块磁石指向另一块磁石。另一些实施例中，第一防抖磁性件132也可以采用单磁石结构，例如由一块磁石组成，该磁石包括极性方向相反的两个部分，该磁石可以采用双极充磁工艺制成。
请参阅图25，图25是图21所示马达1沿C-C处剖开的截面结构示意图。
一些实施例中，第二防抖磁性件134固定于防抖支架12，第二防抖线圈133固定于基座11，第二防抖线圈133面向第二防抖磁性件134设置，用于驱动防抖支架12相对基座11沿第二方向Y运动，第二防抖磁性件134和第二防抖线圈133排布于第三方向Z。其中，第二防抖线圈133面向第二防抖磁性件134设置，是指第二防抖线圈133的绕线平面面向第二防抖磁性件134。例如，第二防抖线圈133的绕线平面可以平行于X-Y平面设置。示例性的，固定于的基座11的底板111的第二防抖传感器172(可参阅图7)可以用于检测防抖支架12在第二方向Y上的位置变化。
在本实施例中，在防抖支架12相对基座11沿第二方向Y运动的过程中，防抖支架12的运动方向垂直于第二防抖磁性件134与第二防抖线圈133的磁间隙，上述磁间隙不受防抖支架12的运动动作影响，因此能够避免因磁间隙增加而导致的驱动力快速下降的问题，从而确保马达1的防抖驱动力较大，并且驱动力较为稳定，有利于马达1的光学防抖功能的大行程设计。
在第一防抖磁性件132、第一防抖线圈131、第二防抖磁性件134以及第二防抖线圈133的驱动下，防抖支架12能够带动对焦支架21及镜头2，沿第一方向X和/或第二方向Y相对基座11运动，从而实现X-Y平面的运动，此时，马达1可以实现摄像模组100的光学防抖。而基于第一防抖磁性件132、第一防抖线圈131、第二防抖磁性件134以及第二防抖线圈133的排布位置等相关设计，马达1可以实现光学防抖的大行程设计，以获得更佳的拍摄体验。
在本实施例中，第一防抖线圈131和第一防抖磁性件132驱动防抖支架12运动的方向、与第二防抖线圈133和第二防抖磁性件134驱动防抖支架12运动的方向相互垂直；在其他一些实施例中，第一防抖线圈131和第一防抖磁性件132驱动防抖支架12运动的方向、与第二防抖线圈133和第二防抖磁性件134驱动防抖支架12运动的方向也可以相交但不垂直。
示例性的，第二防抖磁性件134可以具有两个方向相反的极性方向，第二防抖磁性件134的极性方向与第二防抖线圈133的绕线平面垂直设置。其中，第二防抖线圈133的两段区域的线圈可以分别对应第二防抖磁性件134的两个极性方向设置，两段区域的线圈内的电流流向相反。第二防抖磁性件134朝向第二防抖线圈133的一侧包括北极(N)和南极(S)，第二防抖磁性件134背向对焦线圈221的一侧对应地包括南极(S)和北极(N)。
示例性的，第二防抖磁性件134可以包括一个或多个磁石，第二防抖磁性件134的实现结构可以有多种。例如，一些实施例中，如图25所示，第二防抖磁性件134可以采用双磁石结构，例如由两块磁石组成，两块磁石排布于第二方向Y，且极性方向相反。另一些实施例中，第二防抖磁性件134为海尔贝克磁石阵列。例如，第二防抖磁性件134可以包括至少三块磁石，相邻的三块磁石中，位于边上的两块磁石的极化方向相反，且垂直于三块磁石的排布方向，位于中间的磁石的极化方向由其中一块磁石指向另一块磁石。另一些实施例中，第二防抖磁性件134也可以采用单磁石结构，例如由一块磁石组成，该磁石包括极性方向相反的两个部分，该磁石可以采用双极充磁工艺制成。
如图22和图25所示，马达1的防抖驱动机构13的线圈和磁性件均大致排布于X-Y平面，通过增加 磁性件宽度(也即第一防抖磁性件132在第一方向X的尺寸、第二防抖磁性件134在第二方向Y上的尺寸)，即可以增加防抖支架12在第一方向X和/或第二方向Y上的运动行程，有利于在不增加马达1高度的前提下实现光学防抖的大行程设计。此外，由于马达1在光学防抖过程中的运动阻力主要是支撑件与配合结构件的滑动摩擦力，与运动行程无关，因此在进行大行程的光学防抖时，阻力不会明显增大，从而能够在无需大幅提高驱动力的前提下实现光学防抖的大行程设计。
如图22和图25所示，马达1的对焦驱动机构22和防抖驱动机构13均为动磁设计，马达1在第一方向X、第二方向Y及第三方向Z上的驱动均由一组驱动件(包括线圈和磁性件)单独控制。其中，马达1的对焦支架21相对防抖支架12沿第三方向Z移动、进行自动对焦的过程中，防抖支架12与基座11的相对位置不受影响，防抖驱动机构13的磁间隙宽度不发生变化，同样的，防抖支架12相对基座11沿第一方向X和/或第二方向Y移动、进行光学防抖的过程中，对焦支架21随防抖支架12移动，两者的相对位置不受影响，对焦驱动机构22的磁间隙宽度不发生变化，因此马达1的对焦驱动机构22与防抖驱动机构13实现解耦，运动过程中互不干扰，有利于确保马达1的驱动精度。
此外，由于对焦支架21位于防抖支架12内侧，对焦线圈221固定于防抖支架12，对焦磁性件222固定于对焦支架21，因此马达1的光学防抖的动子组件包裹着对焦的动子组件.对焦支架21位于防抖支架12的内侧。可以理解的是，当对焦支架21位于防抖支架12的内侧时，防抖支架12可以围绕对焦支架21设置。围绕可以是防抖支架12环绕对焦支架21一周设置，也可以是在防抖支架12的一部分围绕对焦支架21设置。在本实施方式中，防抖支架12呈框状。此时，防抖支架12环绕对焦支架21设置。
可以理解的是，在一些方案中，防抖支架位于对焦支架的内侧。此时，当摄像模组需要对焦时，对焦支架需要带动防抖支架、镜头以及可变光圈沿第三方向移动。这样对焦支架、防抖支架、镜头以及可变光圈所构成的动子的重量较重，从而导致对焦驱动机构需要通过增大体积来提高驱动力。因此，该设置不利于马达的轻型化和小型化设计。而在本实施例中，通过将对焦支架21设置于防抖支架12的内侧。此时，当摄像模组100需要对焦时，对焦支架21需要带动镜头2以及可变光圈3沿第三方向Z移动。这样，本实施方式在对焦过程中的动子可以省去防抖支架12，也即对焦支架21、镜头2以及可变光圈3构成的动子的重量较轻，从而有利于对焦驱动机构22的小型化设置。本实施方式的马达1能够实现轻型化和小型化设置。
另外，在本实施例中，对焦支架21与防抖支架12之间的连接位置到对焦支架21、镜头2以及可变光圈3所构成的动子的重心之间的距离较近，有利于降低动子发生倾覆的风险。
可以理解的是，相较于防抖支架在对焦支架的内侧的方案，防抖支架至少需要两个防抖驱动机构来推动防抖支架在X-Y平面运动。这样，马达也就需要至少排布两套线路来给防抖驱动机构提供信号和供电。而且至少两套线路需要穿过对焦支架。因此，该方案的通电设置较为复杂，提高了马达的设置的难度。而本实施例通过将对焦支架21设置于防抖支架12的内侧，由于对焦支架21需要一套对焦驱动机构22来推动对焦支架21沿第三方向Z移动，使得马达1也就需要一套线路来给对焦驱动机构22提供信号和供电，也即需要一套线路穿过防抖支架12。因此，本实施方式的方案的通电方案较为简单，可以较大程度地降低马达1的设置难度。
另外，通过将对焦支架21设置于防抖支架12的内侧，可以使得对焦线圈221和对焦磁性件222更靠近镜头2排布。这样，当对焦线圈221和对焦磁性件222竖直排布时，对焦线圈221和对焦磁性件222可以在局部上凸出马达1的上表面。可以理解的是，该凸出部分可以设置在摄像头装饰件的内部，以较好地提高摄像头装饰件的空间利用率。
如图22所示，对焦线圈221的导线所缠绕的平面(也即绕线平面)可以平行于第三方向Z。此时，对焦线圈221呈竖直排布，从而使得对焦线圈221可以在X-Y平面的占用的面积较小，进而有利于马达1的小型化设置。对焦磁性件222可以包括相反的两个极性方向，两个极性方向均垂直于第三方向Z。此时，对焦磁性件222可以呈竖直排布，从而减小对焦磁性件222在X-Y平面的占用空间，便于马达1的小型化设计。
在本申请实施例中，马达1的防抖驱动机构13利用防抖支架12的两侧空间进行排布，对焦驱动机构22利用防抖支架12的第三侧空间进行排布，防抖支架12的剩余一侧空间可以不排布驱动组件，使得马达1能够在确保对焦功能和防抖功能的情况下，整体结构排布紧凑，空间利用率高，有利于小型化设计。
请结合参阅图26和图27，图26是图21所示马达1沿D-D处剖开的截面结构示意图,图27是图21所示马达1沿E-E处剖开的截面结构示意图。
一些实施例中，导向支架14的第一支撑部141位于防抖支架12的第一角部12a与基座11的底板111 之间，第一支撑部141通过其中一个第一支撑件151连接基座11，并通过其中一个第二支撑件152连接防抖支架12。导向支架14的第二支撑部143位于防抖支架12的第二角部12c与基座11的底板111之间，第二支撑部143通过另一个第一支撑件151连接基座11，并通过另一个第二支撑件152连接防抖支架12。导向支架14的第三支撑部145位于防抖支架12的第三角部12e与基座11的底板111之间，第三支撑部145通过另一个第一支撑件151连接基座11，并通过另一个第二支撑件152连接防抖支架12。此时，导向支架14的三个支撑部(141、143、145)均位于防抖支架12与基座11之间，且与防抖支架12的第一角部12a、第二角部12c及第三角部12e一一对应设置，三个支撑部(141、143、145)通过多个第一支撑件151连接基座11。多个第一支撑件151的导向方向与多个第二支撑件152的导向方向不同，以使防抖支架12与导向支架14的相对运动方向不同于导向支架14与基座11的相对运动方向。
在本实施例中，导向支架14采用L形，相较于框形结构，体积明显减小，能够节约两边空间，从而有利于马达1及摄像模组100的小型化。并且，由于导向支架14的三个支撑部(141、143、145)对应于防抖支架12的三个角部(12a、12c、12e)设置，第一防抖磁性件132和第一防抖线圈131位于第一支撑部141与第二支撑部143之间，第二防抖磁性件134和第二防抖线圈133位于第二支撑部143与第三支撑部145之间，因此导向支架14能够在减小体积的情况下，保证防抖支架12及基座11的连接可靠性，能够实现稳定支撑和准确导向的作用，确保第一防抖磁性件132与第一防抖线圈131的相对位置及第二防抖磁性件134与第二防抖线圈133的相对位置的稳定性，使得马达1的光学防抖运动平稳、可靠。
此外，马达1通过导向支架14和防抖支架12的双层支架设计，每一层支架均与支撑件及相邻结构件配合构成一个方向的导向，两个方向的导向不会发生串扰，从而有利于实现光学防抖的精确导向。其中，基于多个第一支撑件151的导向作用，导向支架14和防抖支架12能够一起相对基座11沿第二方向Y移动，基于多个第二支撑件152的导向作用，防抖支架12能够相对导向支架14沿第一方向X运动，因此马达1能够通过基座11、第一支撑件151、导向支架14、第二支撑件152及防抖支架12的配合结构，在光学防抖过程中实现精确导向，从而解决传统马达1进行光学防抖时出现镜头2倾斜(tilt)过大的问题。
请再次参阅图16、图22以及图25，一些实施例中，马达1对应于防抖支架12的第一边部12b和第二边部12d的两边位置排布防抖驱动机构13和导向支架14，对应于防抖支架12的第三边部12f的一边位置用于排布对焦驱动机构22，对应于防抖支架12的第四边部12g的一边位置不排布驱动机构，因此马达1能够充分利用其三边位置排布驱动机构，而剩余一边位置则尽量缩小体积，从而有利于马达1整体的小型化设置。
一些实施例中，如图22和图26所示，第一防抖磁吸件161固定于底座的底板111，例如可以位于第一防抖线圈131背向第一防抖磁性件132的一侧。第一防抖磁吸件161面向第一防抖磁性件132设置，第一防抖磁吸件161与第一防抖磁性件132之间的磁性力使得防抖支架12具有靠近基座11的底板111的趋势。如图25和图27所示，第二防抖磁吸件162固定于底座的底板111，例如可以位于第二防抖线圈133背向第二防抖磁性件134的一侧。第二防抖磁吸件162面向第二防抖磁性件134设置，第二防抖磁吸件162与第二防抖磁性件134之间的磁性力使得防抖支架12具有靠近基座11的底板111的趋势。
在本实施例中，通过第一防抖磁吸件161与第一防抖磁性件132之间的磁性力、第二防抖磁吸件162与第二防抖磁性件134之间的磁性力，使得防抖支架12具有靠近基座11的底板111的趋势，从而确保基座11、第二支撑件152、导向支架14、第一支撑件151及防抖支架12之间保持接触，实现预紧。
示例性的，如图22所示，第一防抖磁吸件161正对第一防抖磁性件132设置，第一防抖磁吸件161在第一方向X上的尺寸大于第一防抖磁性件132在第一方向X上的尺寸。此时，第一防抖磁吸件161在第一方向X上相对第一防抖磁性件132的两侧凸出，在马达1的光学防抖过程中，第一防抖磁性件132与第一防抖磁性件132之间仍可保持正对关系或几乎正对的关系，从而保证磁吸力的稳定。其中，第一防抖磁吸件161在X-Y面的投影在第一方向X上覆盖第一防抖磁性件132在X-Y面的投影，即可认为两者是正对关系。
如图25所示，在第二方向Y上，第二防抖磁吸件162正对第二防抖磁性件134，且第二防抖磁吸件162的尺寸大于第二防抖磁性件134的尺寸。此时，第二防抖磁吸件162在第二方向Y上相对第二防抖磁性件134的两侧凸出，在马达1的光学防抖过程中，第二防抖磁性件134与第二防抖磁性件134之间仍可保持正对关系或几乎正对的关系，从而保证磁吸力的稳定。其中，第二防抖磁吸件162在X-Y面的投影在第二方向Y上覆盖第二防抖磁性件134在X-Y面的投影，即可认为两者是正对关系。
一些实施例中，如图26和图27所示，由于第一防抖磁吸件161位于第一支撑部141与第二支撑部143之间，第二防抖磁吸件162位于第二支撑部143与第三支撑部145之间，因此第一防抖磁吸件161与第一 防抖磁性件132之间的磁性力、第二防抖磁吸件162与第二防抖磁性件134之间的磁性力，能够更好地确保导向支架14的三个支撑部(141、143、145)通过支撑件与基座11及防抖支架12之间的连接，提高了马达1的光学防抖过程的可靠性。
示例性的，如图26所示，在第二方向Y上，第一防抖磁吸件161与第一角部12a之间的中心距离小于第一防抖磁吸件161与第二角部12c之间的中心距离；如图27所示，在第一方向X上，第二防抖磁吸件162与第三角部12e之间的中心距离小于第二防抖磁吸件162与第二角部12c之间的中心距离。此时，第一防抖磁吸件161和第二防抖磁吸件162的位置设置，能够使导向支架14的三个支撑部(141、143、145)与基座11及防抖支架12之间的预紧力更为平衡、可靠。
可以理解的是，在其他一些实施例中，第一防抖磁吸件161和第二防抖磁吸件162的大小、形状及位置也可以进行调整，本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
一些实施例中，多个第一支撑件151与导向支架14之间的配合包括紧配和松配，以降低装配难度。例如，如图9所示，导向支架14的多个第一滑槽148中，包括至少一个“V”形槽和至少一个“U”形槽或“L”形槽。“V”形槽与第一支撑件151配合时，第一滑槽148的侧面槽壁接触第一支撑件151，实现紧配。例如，位于第一支撑部141和第二支撑部143的第一滑槽148为“V”形槽。“U”形槽或“L”形槽与第一支撑件151配合时，第一滑槽148的底面槽壁接触第一支撑件151，实现松配。例如，位于第三支撑部145的第一滑槽148为“U”形槽。
一些实施例中，多个第二支撑件152与防抖支架12之间的配合包括紧配和松配，以降低装配难度。例如，如图13所示，防抖支架12的多个第二滑槽121中，包括至少一个“V”形槽和至少一个“U”形槽或“L”形槽。“V”形槽与第二支撑件152配合时，第二滑槽121的侧面槽壁接触第二支撑件152，实现紧配。例如，位于第二角部12c和第三角部12e的第二滑槽121为“V”形槽。“U”形槽或“L”形槽与第二支撑件152配合时，第二滑槽121的底面槽壁接触第二支撑件152，实现松配。例如，位于第一角部12a的第二滑槽121为“U”形槽。
可以理解的是，在其他一些实施例中，多个第一支撑件151与导向支架14之间的紧配和松配设计可以有其他实现方案，例如可以两个松配和一个紧配组合，或者紧配和松配的排布位置发生变化等，本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。同样的，在其他一些实施例中，多个第二支撑件152与防抖支架12之间的紧配和松配设计可以有其他实现方案，例如可以两个松配和一个紧配组合，或者紧配和松配的排布位置发生变化等，本申请实施例对此不作严格限定。
在前文实施例中，防抖支架12的第一边部12b、第二边部12d、第三边部12f及第四边部12g为顺时针排布，第一防抖磁性件132、第二防抖磁性件134及对焦线圈221的位置对应地呈顺时针排布。在其他一些实施例中，防抖支架12的多个边部也可以有不同的排布位置。例如：
请结合参阅图28和图29，图28是图4所示马达1在另一些实施例中的部分结构示意图，图29是图28所示结构的分解结构示意图。本实施例可以包括前文实施例的大部分技术方案，以下主要说明两者的区别，两者相同的大部分内容不进行赘述。
一些实施例中，防抖支架12的第一边部12b、第二边部12d、第三边部12f及第四边部12g为逆时针排布，第一防抖磁性件132、第二防抖磁性件134及对焦线圈221的位置对应地呈顺时针排布。本实施例中的其他相关结构做适应性调整。
在前文实施例中，防抖磁性件固定于基座11的底板111，导向支架14的三个支撑部(141、143、145)位于防抖支架12与基座11的底板111之间，第一支撑件151位于导向支架14的三个支撑部(141、143、145)与基座11的底板111之间，马达1的预紧结构采用下磁吸方案。在其他一些实施例中，马达1的预紧结构也采用上磁吸方案，基座11结构、防抖磁性件的结构及位置、导向支架14的结构及位置、防抖支架12的结构及位置进行调整。例如：
请结合参阅图30和图31，图30是图4所示马达1在另一些实施例中的部分结构示意图，图31是图30所示结构的分解结构示意图。本实施例可以包括前文实施例的大部分技术方案，以下主要说明两者的区别，两者相同的大部分内容不进行赘述。
一些实施例中，基座11包括底板111、侧框112以及顶板113，顶板113与底板111相对设置，侧框112连接于底板111与顶板113之间。基座11的顶板113、侧板及顶板113为相互固定的结构。其中，底板111与侧框112可以为一体成型的结构件，顶板113与侧框112可以通过组装形成一体化结构。或者， 顶板113与侧框112可以为一体成型的结构件，底板111与侧框112可以通过组装形成一体化结构。
其中，第一防抖磁性件132和第二防抖磁性件134固定于防抖支架12，第一防抖线圈131和第二防抖线圈133固定于底板111，第一防抖线圈131面向第一防抖磁性件132设置，第二防抖线圈133面向第二防抖磁性件134设置，防抖支架12能够相对基座11沿X-Y平面移动，以实现光学防抖。
请结合参阅图31至图33，图32是图31所示顶板113在另一角度的结构示意图，图33是图31所示防抖支架12在另一角度的结构示意图。
一些实施例中，基座11的底板111的三个角区可以不设置凹槽。基座11的顶板113可以设置多个第三滑槽1131，多个第三滑槽1131可以分别位于顶板113的三个角区，第三滑槽1131的延伸方向可以平行于第一方向X。导向支架14可以设有多个第三凹槽149和多个第四滑槽1410。多个第三凹槽149分别位于第一支撑部141、第二支撑部143及第三支撑部145，第三凹槽149的延伸方向可以平行于第一方向X。多个第四滑槽1410与多个第三凹槽149相背设置，多个第四滑槽1410分别位于第一支撑部141、第二支撑部143及第三支撑部145，第四滑槽1410的延伸方向可以平行于第二方向Y。防抖支架12设有多个第四凹槽129，多个第四凹槽129可以分别位于第一角部12a、第二角部12c以及第三角部12e，第四凹槽129的延伸方向可以平行于第二方向Y。
请结合参阅图31至图35，图34是图30所示结构沿F-F处剖开的截面结构示意图，图35是图30所示结构沿G-G处剖开的截面结构示意图。
一些实施例中，防抖驱动机构13包括防抖磁吸件16，防抖磁吸件16固定于基座11的顶板113。防抖支架12位于侧框112的内侧，导向支架14的三个支撑部(141、143、145)位于防抖支架12与顶板113之间。防抖磁吸件16与第一防抖磁性件132及第二防抖磁性件134之间的磁吸力，使得防抖支架12具有靠近顶板113的趋势。
其中，导向支架14的第一支撑部141位于防抖支架12的第一角部12a与顶板113之间，导向支架14的第二支撑部143位于防抖支架12的第二角部12c与顶板113之间，导向支架14的第三支撑部145位于防抖支架12的第三角部12e与顶板113之间。多个第一支撑件151一一对应地安装于导向支架14的多个第三凹槽149，顶板113的多个第三滑槽1131与导向支架14的多个第三凹槽149一一对应设置，安装于第三凹槽149的第一支撑件151部分嵌入第一滑槽148中。导向支架14通过多个第一支撑件151滑动连接顶板113，两者的相对滑动方向平行于多个第一支撑件151的导向方向。多个第二支撑件152一一对应地安装于防抖支架12的多个第四凹槽129，导向支架14的多个第四滑槽1410与防抖支架12的多个第四凹槽129一一对应设置，安装于第四凹槽129的第二支撑件152部分嵌入第四滑槽1410中。防抖支架12通过多个第二支撑件152滑动连接导向支架14，两者的相对滑动方向平行于多个第二支撑件152的导向方向。
其中，多个第一支撑件151的导向方向与多个第二支撑件152的导向方向相交。例如，多个第一支撑件151的导向方向可以平行于第一方向X，多个第二支撑件152的导向方向可以平行于第二方向Y。在其他一些实施例中，多个第一支撑件151的导向方向和多个第二支撑件152的导向方向可以对调，顶板113、导向支架14、防抖支架12上的凹槽和/或滑槽的延伸方向做适应性变化。
在本实施例中，由于防抖支架12在磁性力下具有靠近顶板113的趋势，因此可以确保顶板113、多个第一支撑件151、导向支架14、多个第二支撑件152及防抖支架12保持接触，从而在防抖支架12相对基座11运动的过程中实现精确导向，以提高光学防抖的可靠性和精确度。其中，当防抖支架12受到平行于第一支撑件151的导向方向的驱动力时，防抖支架12和导向支架14一起相对基座11沿第一支撑件151的导向方向运动；当防抖支架12受到平行于第二支撑件152的导向方向的驱动力时，导向支架14相对基座11静止，防抖支架12相对导向支架14和基座11沿第二支撑件152的导向方向运动。
如图31、图34以及图35所示，一些实施例中，顶板113可以呈L形。例如，顶板113可以包括彼此间隔的三个角区和连接三个角区的两个边区，两个边区呈夹角设置。顶板113与导向支架14对应设置。例如，顶板113的三个角区与导向支架14的三个支撑部(141、143、145)对应设置，顶板113的两个边区与导向支架14的两个连接部(142、144)对应设置。此时，顶板113在配合其他结构实现导向作用的情况下，体积较小，从而有利于马达1的小型化设计。可以理解的是，在其他一些实施例中，顶板113也可以呈框形。
其中，导向支架14的第一连接部142可以层叠于防抖支架12的第一边部12b与顶板113之间，导向支架14的第二连接部144可以层叠于防抖支架12的第二边部12d与顶板113之间。或者，第一连接部142可以位于第一边部12b背向活动空间124的一侧，第二连接部144可以位于第二边部12d背向活动空间124 的一侧，以采用外绕排布的方式，降低马达1的高度，实现小型化。
示例性的，防抖磁吸件16位于顶板113背向导向支架14的一侧，防抖磁吸件16为一体结构件。此时，防抖磁吸件16的数量少，并且组装方便。并且防抖磁吸件16的面积大，能够确保防抖磁吸件16与第一防抖磁性件132及第二防抖磁性件134之间的磁性力的大小和稳定性，以提高马达1的光学防抖的可靠性。
如图31和图34所示，一些实施例中，马达1还包括多个第一簧片18，多个第一簧片18的排布平面可以平行于第三方向Z，且位于防抖支架12背向第一边部12b或第二边部12d的一侧，例如可以靠近防抖支架12的第三边部12f或第四边部12g的外侧设置。多个第一簧片18连接防抖支架12与底板111。此时，多个第一簧片18排布于X-Z平面或Y-Z平面，多个第一簧片18与基座11及防抖支架12的排布紧凑，有利于降低马达1的高度，实现马达1的小型化。
在前文实施例中，马达1的防抖驱动机构13主要采用单线圈驱动方案。在其他一些实施例中，马达1的防抖驱动机构13也可以采用双线圈驱动方案。例如：
请结合参阅图36至图39，图36是图4所示马达1在另一些实施例中的部分结构示意图，图37是图36所示结构的分解结构示意图，图38是图37所示结构在另一角度的结构示意图，图39是图36所示结构沿H-H剖开的截面结构示意图。本实施例可以包括前文实施例的大部分技术方案，以下主要说明两者的区别，两者相同的大部分内容不进行赘述。
一些实施例中，基座11包括底板111、侧框112以及顶板113，顶板113与底板111相对设置，侧框112连接于底板111与顶板113之间。第一防抖磁性件132固定于防抖支架12的第一边部12b，第二防抖磁性件134固定于防抖支架12的第二边部12d，防抖支架12位于侧框112的内侧。第一防抖线圈131可以包括第一子线圈1311和第二子线圈1312，第一子线圈1311固定于底板111且面向第一防抖磁性件132设置，第二子线圈1312固定于顶板113且面向第一防抖磁性件132设置。其中，第一防抖磁性件132可以具有两个方向相反的极性方向(如图39中箭头所示)，第一防抖磁性件132的极性方向与第一子线圈1311的绕线平面和第二子线圈1312的绕线平面垂直设置。第一子线圈1311和第二子线圈1312通电时，驱动防抖支架12相对基座11沿第一方向X运动。
第二防抖线圈133可以包括第三子线圈1331和第四子线圈1332，第三子线圈1331固定于底板111且面向第二防抖磁性件134设置，第四子线圈1332固定于顶板113且面向第一防抖磁性件132设置。第三子线圈1331和第四子线圈1332通电时，驱动防抖支架12相对基座11沿第一方向X运动。其中，第二防抖磁性件134可以具有两个方向相反的极性方向(如图39中箭头所示)，第二防抖磁性件134的极性方向与第三子线圈1331的绕线平面和第四子线圈1332的绕线平面垂直设置。
在本实施例中，马达1的防抖驱动机构13采用双线圈驱动方案，能够提供更大的驱动力，有利于提高驱动效率，增加光学防抖行程。此外，由于第一子线圈1311和第二子线圈1312分别位于第一防抖磁性件132的相背两侧，第一子线圈1311和第二子线圈1312的驱动力的伴随力可以相互抵消，从而实现更准确的驱动动作。由于第三子线圈1331和第四子线圈1332分别位于第二防抖磁性件134的相背两侧，第一子线圈1311和第二子线圈1312的驱动力的伴随力可以相互抵消，从而实现更准确的驱动动作。其中，伴随力是指磁性件边缘磁场线倾斜导致磁力在非运动方向的分量。
其中，基座11的导电件可以包括排布于底板111的第一部分、排布于侧框112的第二部分以及排布于顶板113的第三部分，第一子线圈1311和第三子线圈1331可以电连接第一部分，第三部分经第二部分电连接第一部分，第二子线圈1312和第四子线圈1332可以电连接第三部分。
示例性的，第一子线圈1311和第二子线圈1312的电流方向可以相同。示例性的，第一子线圈1311和第二子线圈1312可以串联设置。或者，第一子线圈1311和第二子线圈1312也可以并联设置，或者分开单独供电。其中，第一子线圈1311和第二子线圈1312的线径、匝数等参数可以设置为相同值，或者也可以设置为不同值。
示例性的，第三子线圈1331和第四子线圈1332可以串联设置。或者，第三子线圈1331和第四子线圈1332也可以并联设置，或者分开单独供电。其中，第三子线圈1331和第四子线圈1332的线径、匝数等参数可以设置为相同值，或者也可以设置为不同值。
如图39所示，一些实施例中，第一子线圈1311、第一防抖磁性件132以及第二子线圈1312可以在第三方向Z上对齐设置。也即，第一子线圈1311的中心、第一防抖磁性件132的中心以及第二子线圈1312的中心在第三方向Z上对齐或几乎对齐。此时，第一子线圈1311和第二子线圈1312与第一防抖磁性件132 之间的驱动力较大，并且第一子线圈1311、第一防抖磁性件132以及第二子线圈1312在X-Y平面上的排布空间较小，有利于马达1的小型化。其中，第三子线圈1331、第二防抖磁性件134及第四子线圈1332可以做相同或相似设计，此处不进行赘述。
请参阅图40，图40是图39所示结构在另一些实施例中的部分结构示意图。
在另一些实施例中，第一子线圈1311和第二子线圈1312的排布位置可以不同于图39所示实施例。例如，在第一方向X上，第一子线圈1311可以相对第一防抖磁性件132向一侧偏置，第二子线圈1312相对第二防抖磁性件134可以向另一侧偏置。此时，第一子线圈1311、第二防抖磁性件134以及第二子线圈1312大致排布于第三方向Z，但第一子线圈1311的中心、第一防抖磁性件132的中心以及第二子线圈1312的中心在第三方向Z上处于非对齐的位置关系，第一子线圈1311和第二子线圈1312可以相对第一防抖磁性件132在第一方向X上进行两侧偏置，从而达到均衡磁力的目的。其中，第三子线圈1331、第二防抖磁性件134及第四子线圈1332可以做相同或相似设计，此处不进行赘述。
请再次参阅图39，一些实施例中，第一防抖磁性件132可以包括相对地排布于第三方向Z的第一子磁性件1321和第二子磁性件1322，第一子磁性件1321和第二子磁性件1322的极性方向的排布一致，且均具有相反的两个极性方向。防抖驱动机构13的第一防抖导磁件135位于第一子磁性件1321与第二子磁性件1322之间。其中，第一防抖导磁件135包括第一部分135a和连接第一部分135a的第二部分135b，第一部分135a嵌入第一边部12b，第二部分135b相对防抖支架12露出。第一子磁性件1321固定于第二部分135b的一侧表面，第二子磁性件1322固定于第二部分135b的另一侧表面，此时，第一子磁性件1321、第一防抖导磁件135及第二子磁性件1322排布于第三方向Z。其中，第一子磁性件1321可以位于第一防抖导磁件135与第一子线圈1311之间，第二子磁性件1322可以位于第一防抖导磁件135与第二子线圈1312之间。在本实施例中，第一防抖磁性件132与第一防抖导磁件135的组装结构简单、易实现，且成本低。
其中，第一防抖导磁件135与防抖支架12可以采用模内注塑形成一体成型的结构件，也可以通过组装形成一体化结构。在其他一些实施例中，在双线圈驱动方案中，防抖驱动机构13也可以不设置第一防抖导磁件135。此时，第一子磁性件1321和第二子磁性件1322可以直接固定在一起，并固定于防抖支架12。
其中，第一子磁性件1321和第二子磁性件1322可以采用双磁石结构、海尔贝克磁石阵列结构或者单磁石结构，细节方案可以参阅前文实施例的相关描述，此处不进行赘述。
请参阅图41，图41是图39所示结构在另一些实施例中的部分结构示意图。
一些实施例中，第一防抖磁性件132可以由第一磁石1323和第二磁石1324组成，第一磁石1323和第二磁石1324排布于第一方向X，第一磁石1323的极性方向和第二磁石1324的极性方向相反。其中，第一磁石1323的极性方向和第二磁石1324的极性方向均垂直于第一子线圈1311的绕线平面和第二子线圈1312的绕线平面。本实施例中，防抖驱动机构13不设置第一防抖导磁件。
在另一些实施例中，第一防抖磁性件132也可以为海尔贝克磁石阵列。例如，第一防抖磁性件132可以包括至少三块磁石，相邻的三块磁石中，位于边上的两块磁石的极化方向相反，且垂直于三块磁石的排布方向，位于中间的磁石的极化方向由其中一块磁石指向另一块磁石。本实施例中，防抖驱动机构13不设置第一防抖导磁件。
在另一些实施例中，第一防抖磁性件132也可以由一块磁石组成，该磁石包括极性方向相反的两个部分。该磁石可以采用双极充磁工艺制成。本实施例中，防抖驱动机构13不设置第一防抖导磁件。
可以理解的是，第二防抖磁性件134及第二防抖导磁件136可以参考上述实施例(包括图39所示实施例、图41所示实施例)做相同或相似设计，此处不进行赘述。
在前文实施例中，马达1的对焦线圈221固定于防抖支架12的第三边部12f。在其他一些实施例中，对焦线圈221也可以固定于防抖支架12的第四边部12g，且面向对焦磁性件222设置，用于驱动对焦支架21相对防抖支架12沿第三方向Z运动。此时，防抖支架12的第四边部12g可以设有通孔126，电路板组件23安装于防抖支架12的第四边部12g，对焦线圈221可以通过电路板固定于第四边部12g，对焦线圈221至少部分位于通孔126。在本实施例中，马达1的防抖驱动机构13利用防抖支架12的两侧空间进行排布，对焦驱动机构22利用防抖支架12的第三侧空间进行排布，防抖支架12的剩余一侧空间可以不排布驱动组件，使得马达1能够在确保对焦功能和防抖功能的情况下，整体结构排布紧凑，空间利用率高，有利于小型化设计。其中，对焦支架21的中心轴线与第三边部12f的外侧面的距离，可以小于对焦支架21的中心轴线与第四边部12g的外侧面的距离。当然，在其他一些实施例中，对焦支架21的中心轴线与 第三边部12f的外侧面的距离，也可以等于或大于对焦支架21的中心轴线与第四边部12g的外侧面的距离。本实施例的马达1的其他设计参考前文实施例的相关描述，此处不进行赘述。
下文将结合附图对马达1的对焦驱动模块20的部分方案进行介绍。
请参阅图42，图42是图4所示的马达1的部分结构的分解示意图。本实施例可以包括前文实施例的大部分技术方案，以下主要描述两者的区别，两者相同的大部分内容不再进行赘述。
一些实施例中，第一滑轴235a的一部分设置在对焦支架21的第一滑动槽211内，第二滑轴235b的一部分设置在对焦支架21的第二滑动槽212内。可以理解的是，通过第一滑轴235a与第一滑动槽211的配合，以及第二滑轴235b和第二滑动槽212的配合，从而实现对焦支架21在X-Y平面上的一些方向上的限位，也即避免对焦支架21在该些方向上的移动，进而保证对焦支架21的稳定性。
在一些实施例中，第一滑轴235a可以与对焦支架21紧配。第二滑轴235b可以与对焦支架21松配。例如，设置第一滑动槽211呈“V”字型。第二滑动槽212呈“L”字型或者“U”字型等。这样，利用“V”字型的第一滑动槽211将第一滑轴235a包住。可以理解的是，通过设置第一滑轴235a与对焦支架21紧配，第二滑轴235b与对焦支架21松配，可以降低对焦支架21与防抖支架12的装配难度。
在其他实施例中，对焦支架21也可以通过其他的方式与第一滑轴235a和第二滑轴235b连接。例如，在对焦支架21上设置第一贯穿孔和第二贯穿孔。再将第一滑轴235a和第二滑轴235b分别套设在第一贯穿孔和第二贯穿孔上。
请结合参阅图42和图43，图43是图42所示结构的部分结构在另一角度下的结构示意图。
一些实施例中，对焦支架21与第一滑轴235a之间的接触位置的数量为至少两个，例如包括第一接触位置M1(图42和图43中虚线所围成的区域)和第二接触位置M2(图42和图43中点划线所围成的区域)。其中相对第一接触位置M1，第二接触位置M2靠近基座11的底面设置，也即第二接触位置M2与基座11的底面之间的距离小于第一接触位置M1与基座11的底面之间的距离。
对焦支架21与第二滑轴235b之间的接触位置的数量为至少一个，例如包括第三接触位置N1(图42和图43中虚线所围成的区域)。相对第三接触位置N1，第二接触位置M2靠近基座11的底面设置，也即第三接触位置N1与基座11的底面之间的距离大于第二接触位置M2与基座11的底面之间的距离。
一些实施例中，相对第二滑轴235b，对焦磁吸件233靠近第一滑轴235a设置。换言之，对焦磁吸件233与第一滑轴235a之间的距离小于对焦磁吸件233与第二滑轴235b之间的距离。
可以理解的是，在一些方案中，当对焦支架21的一侧设置对焦磁吸件233和对焦磁性件222，而对焦支架21的另一侧没有设置对焦磁吸件233和对焦磁性件222时，对焦支架21在沿第三方向Z移动的过程中，对焦支架21的另一侧容易受到重力的原因以翻转轴为轴线发生翻转。其中，当电子设备1000的显示屏300(请参阅图2)背向用户(也即摄像模组100朝向用户)时，第一翻转轴为第二接触位置M2的底部边界线与第三接触位置N1的底部边界线之间的连线(图42和图43示意的P1-P2线)。当电子设备1000的显示屏300朝向用户(也即摄像模组100背向用户)时，第二翻转轴为第一接触位置M1的顶部边界线与第三接触位置N1的顶部边界线之间的连线(图42和图43示意的P3-P4线)。当电子设备1000侧立时，第三翻转轴为第一接触位置M1的右侧边界线与第二接触位置M2的右侧边界线之间的连线(图42和图43示意的P5-P6线)。
而在本实施例中，通过将对焦磁吸件233靠近第一滑轴235a设置，使得对焦磁吸件233与对焦磁性件222产生的磁吸力的中心位置靠近第一滑轴235a设置。这样，不管对焦支架21以第一翻转轴(P1-P2线)为轴线发生翻转，还是以第二翻转轴(P3-P4线)为轴线发生翻转，磁吸力的中心位置与翻转轴(P1-P2线或者P3-P4线)之间的垂直距离(也即磁吸力的力臂)均会变长，此时磁吸力的力矩增大。其中，磁吸力的力矩等于磁吸力的大小与磁吸力的力臂之积。由于磁吸力的力矩的增大，使得对焦支架21在抵抗重力的翻转的能力增大，也即对焦支架21在沿第三方向Z的移动的稳定性更佳。
在一种实施例中，对焦磁吸件233与对焦磁性件222产生的磁吸力的中心位置至第一翻转轴(P1-P2线)的垂直距离与磁吸力之积大于对焦动子的重力矩。可以理解的是，对焦动子可以是沿第三方向Z的相关结构，例如对焦支架21、对焦磁性件222、镜头2以及可变光圈3。
在一种实施例中，对焦磁吸件233与对焦磁性件222产生的磁吸力的中心位置至第二翻转轴(P3-P4线)的垂直距离与磁吸力之积大于对焦动子的重力矩。
在一种实施例中，对焦磁吸件233与对焦磁性件222产生的磁吸力的中心位置至第三翻转轴(P5-P6线)的垂直距离与磁吸力之积大于对焦动子的重力矩。
在一种实施例中，对焦磁吸件233的中心与第一滑轴235a之间的距离为a。第一滑轴235a与第二滑轴235b之间的距离为b。其中，a与b满足：1/5b≤a<1/2b。这样在实现对焦支架21在抵抗重力的翻转的能力增大的同时，还可以在对焦磁吸件233与对焦磁性件222产生磁吸力的作用下，对焦支架21均能够与第一滑轴235a和第二滑轴235b紧密配合。
请参阅图44，图44是图5所示马达1的部分结构在另一些实施例中的结构示意图。
一些实施例中，对焦磁吸件233可以包括第一对焦磁吸件2331、第二对焦磁吸件2332以及第三对焦磁吸件2333。示例性地，第一对焦磁吸件2331包括正面以及背向设置的顶面和底面，顶面和底面可以排布于第三方向Z，正面连接在顶面和底面之间。其中，对焦电路板231可以固定于第一对焦磁吸件2331的正面。
在一些实施例中，第二对焦磁吸件2332固定连接第一对焦磁吸件2331的顶面。第二对焦磁吸件2332的一部分相对第一对焦磁吸件2331的正面凸出。第三对焦磁吸件2333固定连接第一对焦磁吸件2331的底面。第三对焦磁吸件2333的一部分相对第一对焦磁吸件2331的正面凸出。这样，在第三方向Z上，第二对焦磁吸件2332与第三对焦磁吸件2333可以间隔地固定连接在第一对焦磁吸件2331上，且均相对第一对焦磁吸件2331的一侧凸出。可以理解的是，第二对焦磁吸件2332可以采用折弯的方式(折弯的角度不限)固定连接在第一对焦磁吸件2331上，也可以采用非折弯方式固定连接在第一对焦磁吸件2331上。此外，第二对焦磁吸件2332可以与第一对焦磁吸件2331形成一体成型结构。第二对焦磁吸件2332也可以采用粘接、焊接等方式固定连接在第一对焦磁吸件2331上。其中，第三对焦磁吸件2333与第一对焦磁吸件2331的连接方式可以参阅第二对焦磁吸件2332与第一对焦磁吸件2331的连接方式，此处不再赘述。
在其他实施例中，第二对焦磁吸件2332与第三对焦磁吸件2333也可以间隔地固定连接在第一对焦磁吸件2331的正面上。在其他实施例中，对焦磁吸件233也可以不包括第二对焦磁吸件2332和第三对焦磁吸件2333。
请结合参阅图45和图46，图45是图44所示的对焦磁吸件233与图5所示对焦磁性件222以及对焦支架21在沿第三方向Z的正方向移动的受力简化示意图，图46是图44所示的对焦磁吸件233与图5所示对焦磁性件222以及对焦支架21在沿第三方向Z的负方向移动的受力简化示意图。
如图45所示，在本实施例中，对焦磁吸件233包括第一对焦磁吸件2331、第二对焦磁吸件2332以及第三对焦磁吸件2333。在第三方向Z上，第二对焦磁吸件2332与第三对焦磁吸件2333间隔地设置在第一对焦磁吸件2331上，且均相对第一对焦磁吸件2331的正面凸出。此外，对焦磁性件222的中心位于第二对焦磁吸件2332的中心与第三对焦磁吸件2333的中心之间。
如图45所示，当对焦磁性件222沿第三方向Z的正方向a1(图45通过带有箭头的实线示意)移动时，对焦磁性件222自第一位置移动至第二位置，第一对焦磁吸件2331与对焦磁性件222之间的磁吸力可以使得对焦磁性件222产生沿第三方向Z的负方向的第一回复力b1(图45通过带有箭头的虚线示意)，第二对焦磁吸件2332与对焦磁性件222之间的磁吸力可以使得对焦磁性件222产生沿第三方向Z的正方向的第二回复力b2(图45通过带有箭头的虚线示意)。这样，第一回复力与第二回复力可以大致抵消或者完全抵消。此时，对焦支架21在沿第三方向Z的正方向的移动的过程中的稳定性更佳。
如图46所示，当对焦磁性件222沿第三方向Z的负方向a2(图46通过带有箭头的实线示意)移动时，对焦磁性件222自第一位置移动至第三位置，第一对焦磁吸件2331与对焦磁性件222之间的磁吸力可以使得对焦磁性件222产生沿第三方向Z的正方向的第三回复力b3(图46通过带有箭头的虚线示意)，第三对焦磁吸件2333与对焦磁性件222之间的磁吸力可以使得对焦磁性件222产生沿第三方向Z的负方向的第四回复力b4。这样，第三回复力与第四回复力可以大致抵消或者完全抵消。此时，对焦支架21在沿第三方向Z的移动的过程中的稳定性更佳。
可以理解的是，在其他一些实施例中，对焦磁吸件233也可以采用覆盖对焦电路板231的结构设计，此时，电路板组件23可以不包括补强件，由对焦磁吸件233提供补强，对焦磁吸件233可以包括第一对焦磁吸件2331、第二对焦磁吸件2332以及第三对焦磁吸件2333，也可以包括第一对焦磁吸件2331、而不包括第二对焦磁吸件2332以及第三对焦磁吸件2333。
请参阅图47，图47是图3所示的摄像模组100在I-I线处的一种实施例的部分剖面图。
一些实施例中，对焦传感器234可以与对焦磁性件222相对设置。对焦传感器234可以用于检测当对焦磁性件222处于不同位置下的磁场强度，以检测对焦支架21的位置。
可以理解的是，当对焦支架21相对防抖支架12沿第三方向Z移动时，对焦支架21可以带动对焦磁性件222相对防抖支架12沿第三方向Z移动。对焦传感器234可以检测对焦磁性件222所在位置的磁场 强度。这样，当对焦传感器234检测到对焦磁性件222的磁场强度时，可以通过磁场强度来确定对焦支架21的位移。可以理解的是，通过对焦传感器234与对焦磁性件222的相互配合，从而实现准确地控制对焦支架21相对防抖支架12沿第三方向Z移动的位移，进而实现镜头2组件的闭环设计。
一些实施例中，对焦支架21的内侧可以具有凸起213。当镜头2安装于对焦支架21时，凸起213可以与镜头2的镜筒的部分结构相对设置。这样，通过在凸起213与镜头2的镜筒之间设置胶层214，以使镜头2稳定地固定连接对焦支架21。另外，凸起213与胶层214也可以形成互锁结构，从而进一步地提高对焦支架21与镜头2之间的连接稳定性。
一些实施例中，限位支架30固定在防抖支架12上。镜头2的一部分位于限位支架30朝向模组电路板的一侧。镜头2的一部分穿过限位支架30，并位于限位支架30的远离模组电路板的一侧。这样，当对焦支架21带动镜头2沿第三方向Z的正方向移动时，限位支架30可以对镜头2在第三方向Z上进行限位，也即避免对焦支架21沿第三方向Z上从防抖支架12上滑出。
一些实施例中，限位支架30上可以设置缓冲垫。当对焦支架21带动镜头2沿第三方向Z的正方向移动至最高位时，镜头2可以与缓冲垫接触。相较于镜头2直接与限位支架30接触的方案，本实施例的缓冲垫可以避免镜头2与限位支架30因直接碰撞而导致镜头2发生损坏或者移位。
一些实施例中，外壳40可以固定在模组电路板4上。外壳40罩住防抖驱动模块10、对焦驱动模块20以及镜头2的一部分。镜头2的一部分穿过外壳40，并位于外壳40的外部。外壳40可以用于保护防抖驱动模块10、对焦驱动模块20以及镜头2。
下文将结合相关附图再具体介绍对焦驱动芯片232与模组电路板4之间的电路设置。
请参阅图48，图48是图5所示的基座11在不同角度下的一种实施例的结构示意图。
一些实施例中，基座11设有多个接线端子50。例如，接线端子50包括第一接线端子56、第二接线端子57、第三接线端子58以及第四接线端子59。
示例性地，多个接线端子50间隔地固定在基座11上。例如第一接线端子56、第二接线端子57、第三接线端子58以及第四接线端子59均为导电走线。第一接线端子56、第二接线端子57、第三接线端子58以及第四接线端子59均可以间隔地嵌入在基座11内。
示例性地，第一接线端子56可以嵌入在基座11的第一角部29a上。第一接线端子56的接入端561可以相对第一角部29a的顶面露出。第一接线端子56的接出端562可以相对第一角部29a的底面露出。
示例性地，第二接线端子57可以嵌入在基座11的第二角部29b上。第二接线端子57的接入端571可以相对第二角部29b的顶面露出。第二接线端子57的接出端572可以相对第二角部29b的底面露出。
示例性地，第三接线端子58可以嵌入在基座11的第二角部29b上，且与第二接线端子57间隔设置。第三接线端子58的接入端581可以相对第二角部29b的顶面露出，且与第二接线端子57的接入端571间隔设置。第三接线端子58的接出端582可以相对第二角部29b的底面露出，且与第二接线端子57的接出端572间隔设置。
示例性地，第四接线端子59可以嵌入在基座11的第三角部29c上。第四接线端子59的接入端591可以相对第三角部29c的顶面露出。第四接线端子59的接出端592可以相对第三角部29c的底面露出。其中第二角部29b可以位于第一角部29a与第三角部29c之间。
可以理解的是，第一接线端子56的接出端562、第二接线端子57的接出端572、第三接线端子58的接出端582以及第四接线端子59的接出端592可以用于电连接至模组电路板4(请参阅图47)。这样，外部电源可以通过模组电路板4(请参阅图47)向第一接线端子56、第二接线端子57、第三接线端子58以及第四接线端子59给电。
在其他的实施例中，第一接线端子56、第二接线端子57、第三接线端子58以及第四接线端子59也可以分别采用柔性电路板结构。第一接线端子56、第二接线端子57、第三接线端子58以及第四接线端子59也可以集成一个柔性电路板。
请结合参阅图49和图50，图49是图5所示的对焦驱动芯片232电连接至外部结构的线路的一种实施例的结构示意图，图50是图4所示的马达1的一种实施例的部分结构示意图。
一些实施例中，对焦驱动模块20还包括多根走线28a和多个导电弹片28b。例如多根走线28a包括第一走线281、第二走线282、第三走线283、第四走线284。多个导电弹片28b包括第一导电弹片285、第二导电弹片286、第三导电弹片287以及第四导电弹片288。多个导电弹片28b可以为前文实施例中图5中的多个第一簧片的一种实现结构。
示例性地，多根走线28a间隔地嵌设在防抖支架12上。例如第一走线281、第二走线282、第三走线283和第四走线284均为导电走线。第一走线281、第二走线282、第三走线283和第四走线284均可以嵌入在防抖支架12内。在其他实施例中，第一走线281、第二走线282、第三走线283和第四走线284的位置不做具体地限定。
示例性地，每根走线28a的接入端和接出端均相对防抖支架12露出。多根走线28a的接出端一一对应地通过对焦电路板231电连接对焦驱动芯片232的多个端口。
示例性地，第一走线281的接入端281a和第一走线281的接出端281b均可以相对防抖支架12的表面露出。第一走线281的接入端281a可以通过对焦电路板231电连接至对焦驱动芯片232的SDA信号端。可以理解的是，SDA信号端可以用于传输I2C信号的串行数据(serial data，SDA)信号。
示例性地，第二走线282的接入端282a可以相对防抖支架12的表面露出。第二走线282的接入端282a可以通过对焦电路板231电连接至对焦驱动芯片232的SCL信号端。第二走线282的接出端282b可以相对防抖支架12的顶面露出，且与第一走线281的接出端281b间隔设置。可以理解的是，SCL信号端可以用于传输I2C信号的串行时钟(serial cock，SCL)信号。
示例性地，第三走线283的接入端283a可以相对防抖支架12的表面露出。第三走线283的接入端283a可以通过对焦电路板231电连接至对焦驱动芯片232的电源正极端。第三走线283的接出端283b可以相对防抖支架12的顶面露出，且与第一走线281的接出端281b以及第二走线282的接出端282b间隔设置。
示例性地，第四走线284的接入端284a可以相对防抖支架12的表面露出。第四走线284的接入端284a可以通过对焦电路板231电连接至对焦驱动芯片232的电源负极端。第四走线284的接出端284b可以相对防抖支架12的顶面露出，且与第一走线281的接出端281b、第二走线282的接出端282b以及第三走线283的接出端283b间隔设置。
在其他的实施例中，第一走线281、第二走线282、第三走线283、第四走线284也可以分别采用柔性电路板结构。第一走线281、第二走线282、第三走线283、第四走线284也可以集成一个柔性电路板。具体地下文将结合相关附图具体介绍。
请结合参阅图49至图51，图51是图4所示的马达1的一种实施例的部分结构示意图。
一些实施例中，第一导电弹片285、第二导电弹片286、第三导电弹片287以及第四导电弹片288均可以采用金属弹片结构。第一导电弹片285、第二导电弹片286、第三导电弹片287以及第四导电弹片288均可以在应力下发生变形，也即具有可拉伸的作用。
示例性地，多个导电弹片28b间隔地固定在防抖支架12上。例如第一导电弹片285、第二导电弹片286、第三导电弹片287以及第四导电弹片288均可以设置在防抖支架12的顶面。可以理解的是，第一导电弹片285、第二导电弹片286、第三导电弹片287以及第四导电弹片288可以利用马达1的X-Y平面的尺寸空间。这样，第一导电弹片285、第二导电弹片286、第三导电弹片287以及第四导电弹片288可以实现较大面积的设置，从而实现较小的运动反力。可以理解的是，当防抖支架12相对基座11在X-Y平面运动时，第一导电弹片285、第二导电弹片286、第三导电弹片287以及第四导电弹片288发生变形，并产生弹力。当弹力与运动方向相反时，弹力即为运动反力。这样，通过增大第一导电弹片285、第二导电弹片286、第三导电弹片287以及第四导电弹片288的面积，从而有利于使得第一导电弹片285、第二导电弹片286、第三导电弹片287以及第四导电弹片288的长度增长，进而降低第一导电弹片285、第二导电弹片286、第三导电弹片287以及第四导电弹片288的弹力，也即降低运动反力。下文如果出现关于导电弹片28b的运动反力，可以参阅第一导电弹片285、第二导电弹片286、第三导电弹片287以及第四导电弹片288的运动反力的解释，具体地不再赘述。
在其他实施例中，第一导电弹片285、第二导电弹片286、第三导电弹片287以及第四导电弹片288也可以设置在防抖支架12的周侧面。
示例性地，多个导电弹片28b的接入端一一对应地电连接多根走线28a的接出端。此时，多个导电弹片28b的接入端一一对应地通过多根走线28a以及对焦电路板231电连接对焦驱动芯片232的多个端口。
可以理解的是，第一导电弹片285的接入端285a电连接第一走线281的接出端281b。此时，第一导电弹片285可以通过第一走线281、对焦电路板231电连接至对焦驱动芯片232的SDA信号端。第二导电弹片286的接入端286a电连接第二走线282的接出端282b。此时，第二导电弹片286可以通过第二走线282、对焦电路板231电连接至对焦驱动芯片232的SCL信号端。第三导电弹片287的接入端287a电连接第三走线283的接出端283b。此时，第三导电弹片287可以通过第三走线283、对焦电路板231电连接至对焦驱动芯片232的电源正极端。第四导电弹片288的接入端288a电连接第四走线284的接出端284b。 此时，第四导电弹片288可以通过第四走线284、对焦电路板231电连接至对焦驱动芯片232的电源负极端。
在一种实施例中，第一导电弹片285的接入端285a可以通过焊接或者导电胶等方式固定连接第一走线281的接出端281b。第二导电弹片286的接入端286a与第二走线282的接出端282b的连接方式、第三导电弹片287的接入端287a与第三走线283的接出端283b的连接方式、以及第四导电弹片288的接入端288a与第四走线284的接出端284b的连接方式均可以参阅第一导电弹片285的接入端285a与第一走线281的接出端281b的连接方式。具体地这里不再赘述。
如图48至图51所示，多个导电弹片28b的接出端一一对应地电连接多个接线端子50。
示例性地，第一导电弹片285的接出端285b电连接第一接线端子56的接入端561。第二导电弹片286的接出端286b电连接第二接线端子57的接入端571。第三导电弹片287的接出端287b电连接第三接线端子58的接入端581。第四导电弹片288的接出端288b电连接第四接线端子59的接入端591。
在一种实施例中，第一导电弹片285的接出端285b可以通过焊接或者导电胶等方式固定连接第一接线端子56的接入端561。第二导电弹片286的接出端286b与第二接线端子57的接入端571的连接方式、第三导电弹片287的接出端287b与第三接线端子58的接入端581的连接方式、以及第四导电弹片288的接出端288b与第四接线端子59的接入端591的连接方式均可以参阅第一导电弹片285的接出端285b与第一接线端子56的接入端561的连接方式。具体地这里不再赘述。
可以理解的是，由于第一走线281的接入端281a可以通过对焦电路板231电连接至对焦驱动芯片232的SDA信号端、第一导电弹片285的接入端285a电连接第一走线281的接出端281b、第一导电弹片285的接出端285b电连接第一接线端子56的接入端561、以及第一接线端子56的接出端562电连接至模组电路板4，使得外部电源可以通过模组电路板4、第一接线端子56、第一导电弹片285、第一走线281以及对焦电路板231给对焦驱动芯片232的SDA信号端输入信号。相同的，外部电源可以通过模组电路板4、第二接线端子57、第二导电弹片286、第二走线282以及对焦电路板231给对焦驱动芯片232的SCL信号端输入信号。此外，外部电源可以通过模组电路板4、第三接线端子58、第三导电弹片287、第三走线283以及对焦电路板231电连接至对焦驱动芯片232的电源正极端。外部电源可以通过模组电路板4、第四接线端子59、第四导电弹片288、第四走线284以及对焦电路板231电连接至对焦驱动芯片232的电源负极端。
可以理解的是，在本实施例中，由于防抖支架12可以相对基座11在X-Y平面的任意一方向移动，使得防抖支架12与基座11之间的距离在防抖过程中会发生变化。因此本实施例通过设置具有弹性力的第一导电弹片285，以将基座11的第一接线端子56以及防抖支架12的第一走线281进行连接，从而使得防抖支架12与基座11之间的距离发生变化时，利用第一导电弹片285的拉伸来抵消这部分距离变化，以保证线路不容易发生断开，也即提高电路的稳定性。相同的，第二导电弹片286、第二导电弹片286以及第四导电弹片288均具有类似的作用。具体地这里不再赘述。
请结合参阅图51和图52，图52是图5所示的对焦驱动芯片232电连接至外部结构的线路的另一种实施例的结构示意图。
一些实施例中，可变光圈3马达1还可以包括多个导电簧片36a。多个导电簧片36a可以为前文实施例中多个第二簧片的一种实现结构。多个导电簧片36a包括第一导电簧片361、第二导电簧片362、第三导电簧片363以及第四导电簧片364。
示例性地，第一导电簧片361、第二导电簧片362、第三导电簧片363以及第四导电簧片364均可以采用金属弹片结构。第一导电簧片361、第二导电簧片362、第三导电簧片363以及第四导电簧片364均可以在应力下发生变形，也即具有可拉伸的作用。
示例性地，多个导电簧片36a间隔地固定在对焦支架21上。例如第一导电簧片361、第二导电簧片362、第三导电簧片363以及第四导电簧片364均可以间隔地设置在对焦支架21的顶面。
示例性地，多个导电簧片36a的接入端用于一一对应地电连接可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的多个端口。
可以理解的是，第一导电簧片361的接入端3611可以电连接至可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的SDA信号端。在一种实施例中，第一导电簧片361的接入端3611可以通过可变光圈3的电路板以及接线端子等电连接至可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的SDA信号端。可以理解的是，图52通过虚线示意性给出了可变光圈3的驱动芯片31。关于驱动芯片31的实际形状、实际大小、实际位置和实际构造不受图52以及下文各附图限定。
可以理解的是，第二导电簧片362的接入端3621可以电连接至可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的SCL信号 端。在一种实施例中，第二导电簧片362的接入端3621可以通过可变光圈3的电路板以及接线端子等电连接至可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的SCL信号端。
可以理解的是，第三导电簧片363的接入端3631可以电连接至可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的电源正极端。在一种实施例中，第三导电簧片363的接入端3631可以通过可变光圈3的电路板以及接线端子等电连接至可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的电源负极端。
可以理解的是，第四导电簧片364的接入端3641可以电连接至可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的电源负极端。在一种实施例中，第四导电簧片364的接入端3641可以通过可变光圈3的电路板以及接线端子等电连接至可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的电源负极端。
如图51和图52所示，多个导电簧片36a的接出端一一对应地电连接多根走线28a。此时，多个导电簧片36a的接出端一一对应地通过多根走线28a电连接多个导电弹片28b。
可以理解的是，第一导电簧片361的接出端3612电连接至第一走线281。例如，第一走线281的中部的一部分可以相对防抖支架12的顶面露出。第一导电簧片361的接出端3612通过焊接或者导电胶等方式固定连接第一走线281的中部。当然，在其他实施例中，第一导电簧片361的接出端3612也可以通过其他方式电连接至第一走线281，且电连接的位置不做具体地限定。
可以理解的是，第二导电簧片362的接出端3622与第二走线282的连接方式、第三导电簧片363的接出端3632与第三走线283的连接方式、以及第四导电簧片364的接出端3642与第四走线284的连接方式均可以参阅第一导电簧片361的接入端3611与第一走线281的连接方式。具体地这里不再赘述。
可以理解的是，由于第一导电簧片361的接入端3611可以电连接至可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的SDA信号端、第一导电簧片361的接出端3612电连接至第一走线281、第一导电弹片285的接入端285a电连接第一走线281的接出端281b、第一导电弹片285的接出端285b电连接第一接线端子56的接入端561、以及第一接线端子56的接出端562电连接至模组电路板4，使得外部电源可以通过模组电路板4、第一接线端子56、第一导电弹片285、第一走线281以及第一导电簧片361给可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的SDA信号端输入信号。相同的，外部电源可以通过模组电路板4、第二接线端子57、第二导电弹片286、第二走线282以及第二导电簧片362给可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的SCL信号端输入信号。此外，外部电源可以通过模组电路板4、第三接线端子58、第三导电弹片287、第三走线283以及第三导电簧片363连接至可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的电源正极端。外部电源可以通过模组电路板4、第三接线端子58、第三导电弹片287、第三走线283以及第四导电簧片364电连接至可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的电源负极端。
可以理解的是，可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的SDA信号端的线路、可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的SCL信号端的线路、可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的电源正极端的线路、以及可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的电源负极端的线路复用了对焦驱动芯片232的SDA信号端的线路、对焦驱动芯片232的SCL信号端的线路、对焦驱动芯片232的电源正极端的线路、以及对焦驱动芯片232的电源负极端的线路。这样，马达1的线路排布更简化，马达1的结构更加简单。
可以理解的是，在本实施例中，由于对焦支架21可以相对防抖支架12在第三方向Z移动，使得对焦支架21与防抖支架12之间的距离在对焦过程中会发生变化。因此本实施例通过设置具有弹性力的第一导电簧片361，以将对焦支架21的可变光圈3以及防抖支架12的第一走线281进行连接，从而使得对焦支架21与防抖支架12之间的距离发生变化时，利用第一导电簧片361的拉伸来抵消这部分距离变化，以保证线路不容易发生断开，也即提高电路的稳定性。相同的，第二导电簧片362、第二导电簧片362以及第四导电簧片364也均具有类似的作用。具体地这里不再赘述。
上文结合相关附图介绍了对焦驱动芯片232和可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的电路设置的一种实施例。下文将结合相关附图介绍对焦驱动芯片232和可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的工作。
请参阅图53，图53是图4所示的马达1的控制器8、对焦驱动芯片232以及可变光圈3的驱动芯片31之间的电连接关系的一种实施例的示意图。
一些实施例中，摄像模组100包括控制器8。控制器8可以固定在模组电路板4(请参阅图47)上，且电连接模组电路板4。控制器8与对焦驱动芯片232通信连接。控制器8还与可变光圈3的驱动芯片31通信连接。示例性地，控制器8可以通过地址控制来控制对焦驱动芯片232和可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的工作情况。
当摄像模组100需要进入对焦状态时，控制器8控制对焦驱动芯片232处于工作状态，并同时控制可变光圈3的驱动芯片31处于未工作状态(例如可变光圈3的驱动芯片31不能形成电流回路)。如图48至图50所示，SDA信号可以通过模组电路板4、第一接线端子56、第一导电弹片285、第一走线281、对焦 电路板231传输至对焦驱动芯片232的SDA信号端。另外，SCL信号可以通过模组电路板4、第二接线端子57、第二导电弹片286、第二走线282以及对焦电路板231传输至对焦驱动芯片232的SCL信号端。此外，外部电源可以通过模组电路板4、第三接线端子58、第三导电弹片287、第三走线283、第四接线端子59、第四导电弹片288、第四走线284以及对焦电路板231给对焦驱动芯片232供电。
当摄像模组100需要进入调整光圈孔状态时，控制器8控制对焦驱动芯片232处于未工作状态(例如对焦驱动芯片232不能形成电流回路)，并同时控制可变光圈3的驱动芯片31处于工作状态。如图48至图52所示，SDA信号可以通过模组电路板4、第一接线端子56、第一导电弹片285、第一走线281以及第一导电簧片361传输至可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的SDA信号端。另外，SCL信号可以通过模组电路板4、第二接线端子57、第二导电弹片286、第二走线282以及第二导电簧片362传输至可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的SCL信号端。此外，外部电源可以通过模组电路板4、第三接线端子58、第三导电弹片287、第三走线283、第三导电簧片363、第四接线端子59、第四导电弹片288、第四走线284以及第四导电簧片364给可变光圈3的驱动芯片31供电。
上文结合相关附图介绍了对焦驱动芯片232和可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的电路设置的一种实施例。下文结合相关附图再具体介绍对焦驱动芯片232和可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的电路设置的另一种实施例。
请参阅图54至图56，图54是图3所示的摄像模组100在另一种实施例的部分分解示意图，图55是图54所示的马达1在一种实施例的部分分解示意图，图56是图3所示的摄像模组100在另一种实施例的部分结构示意图。
一些实施例中，对焦驱动模块20还包括第一柔性电路板24。第一柔性电路板24电连接在对焦电路板231与模组电路板4之间。对焦驱动芯片232的多个端口可以通过对焦电路板231和第一柔性电路板24电连接至模组电路板4。
可以理解的是，当摄像模组100需要进入对焦状态时，控制器8控制对焦驱动芯片232处于工作状态，并同时控制可变光圈3的驱动芯片31处于未工作状态(例如可变光圈3的驱动芯片31不能形成电流回路)。这样，SDA信号可以通过模组电路板4、第一柔性电路板24以及对焦电路板231传输至对焦驱动芯片232的SDA信号端。另外，SCL信号可以通过模组电路板4、第一柔性电路板24以及对焦电路板231传输至对焦驱动芯片232的SCL信号端。另外，外部电源可以通过模组电路板4、第一柔性电路板24以及对焦电路板231给对焦驱动芯片232供电。
一些实施例中，第一柔性电路板24的一部分也可以位于防抖支架12的第四边部12g与基座11之间，也即第一柔性电路板24位于无磁空间，从而减小对马达1上磁性件的影响。在其他实施例中，第一柔性电路板24的位置不做具体地限定。
一些实施例中，第一柔性电路板24也可以位于防抖支架12的周边的长度空间，从而使得第一柔性电路板24具有较长的悬臂，进而实现较小的运动反力。可以理解的是，当防抖支架12相对基座11在X-Y平面运动时，第一柔性电路板24发生弯折或者变形，并产生方向相反的作用力，也即为运动反力。这样，通过增长第一柔性电路板24的长度，进而降低第一柔性电路板24的运动反力。下文如果出现关于第一柔性电路板24的运动反力，可以参阅第一柔性电路板24的运动反力的解释，具体地不再赘述。
如图54至图56所示，可变光圈3还包括第二柔性电路板32。第二柔性电路板32的一端电连接可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的多个端口，另一端电连接第一柔性电路板24。这样，可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的多个端口可以通过第二柔性电路板32以及第一柔性电路板24电连接至模组电路板4。
可以理解的是，在本实施例中，第二柔性电路板32可以与第一柔性电路板24形成一体成型结构。在其他实施例中，第二柔性电路板32与第一柔性电路板24可以为两个独立的电路板。然后通过两个独立电路板通过电连接器实现电连接。
可以理解的是，当摄像模组100需要进入调整光圈孔状态时，控制器8控制对焦驱动芯片232处于未工作状态(例如对焦驱动芯片232不能形成电流回路)，并同时控制可变光圈3的驱动芯片31处于工作状态。这样，SDA信号可以通过模组电路板4、第一柔性电路板24和第二柔性电路板32传输至可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的SDA信号端。另外，SCL信号可以通过模组电路板4、第一柔性电路板24和第二柔性电路板32传输至可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的SCL信号端。此外，外部电源可以通过模组电路板4、第一柔性电路板24和第二柔性电路板32给可变光圈3的驱动芯片31供电。
可以理解的是，可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的SDA信号端的线路、可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的SCL信号端的线路、可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的电源正极端的线路、以及可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的电源负极端的线路复用了对焦驱动芯片232的SDA信号端的线路、对焦驱动芯片232的SCL信号端的线路、对焦驱 动芯片232的电源正极端的线路、以及对焦驱动芯片232的电源负极端的线路。这样，马达1的线路排布更简化，马达1的结构更加简单。
如图50所示，第二柔性电路板32包括第一段321、第二段322以及第三段323。第二段322连接在第一段321和第三段323之间。第一段321与第三段323相对设置。第二段322呈弯折状。这样，第二柔性电路板32呈上下绕折状态。其中，第一段321电连接可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的多个端口。第三段323通过对焦电路板231电连接至第一柔性电路板24。
可以理解的是，通过将第二柔性电路板32呈上下绕折状态，从而使得对焦支架21与防抖支架12之间的距离发生变化时，利用第二柔性电路板32的可弯折性能来抵消这部分距离变化，以保证线路不容易发生断开，也即提高电路的稳定性。另外，也可以实现第二柔性电路板32的极小运动反力。
一些实施例中，第二柔性电路板32位于马达1的顶部，且第二柔性电路板32在马达1的投影与对焦磁铁错开。换言之，第二柔性电路板32利用了马达1的顶部的无磁空间，从而减小了对马达1的对焦磁铁的影响。在其他实施例中，第二柔性电路板32的位置不做具体地限定。
可以理解的是，上述实施例介绍了几种电路设置。在其他实施例中，对焦驱动芯片232、可变光圈3的驱动芯片31的电路设置不做具体地限定。
需要说明的是，在不冲突的情况下，本申请中的实施例及实施例中的特征可以相互组合，不同实施例中的特征任意组合也在本申请的保护范围内，也就是说，上述描述的多个实施例还可根据实际需要任意组合。
需要说明的是，上述所有附图均为本申请示例性的图示，并不代表产品实际大小。且附图中部件之间的尺寸比例关系也不作为对本申请实际产品的限定。
以上，仅为本申请的部分实施例和实施方式，本申请的保护范围不局限于此，任何熟知本领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (20)

  1. 一种马达(1)，其特征在于，包括基座(11)、防抖支架(12)、第一防抖磁性件(132)、第二防抖磁性件(134)、第一防抖线圈(131)以及第二防抖线圈(133)，所述防抖支架(12)包括依次连接的第一角部(12a)、第一边部(12b)、第二角部(12c)、第二边部(12d)以及第三角部(12e)，所述第一边部(12b)与所述第二边部(12d)呈夹角设置，所述第一防抖磁性件(132)固定于所述第一边部(12b)，所述第二防抖磁性件(134)固定于所述第二边部(12d)；
    所述防抖支架(12)活动连接所述基座(11)，所述第一防抖线圈(131)和所述第二防抖线圈(133)均固定于所述基座(11)，所述第一防抖线圈(131)面向所述第一防抖磁性件(132)设置，用于驱动所述防抖支架(12)相对所述基座(11)沿第一方向运动，所述第二防抖线圈(133)面向所述第二防抖磁性件(134)设置，用于驱动所述防抖支架(12)相对所述基座(11)沿第二方向运动，所述第二方向与所述第一方向相交；
    所述第一防抖磁性件(132)和所述第一防抖线圈(131)排布于第三方向，所述第二防抖磁性件(134)和所述第二防抖线圈(133)排布于所述第三方向，所述第三方向垂直于所述第一方向和所述第二方向；
    所述马达(1)还包括导向支架(14)，所述导向支架(14)呈L形，所述导向支架(14)包括间隔设置的三个支撑部(141、143、145)，三个所述支撑部(141、143、145)均位于所述防抖支架(12)与所述基座(11)之间，且与所述第一角部(12a)、所述第二角部(12c)及所述第三角部(12e)一一对应设置，三个所述支撑部(141、143、145)通过多个第一支撑件(151)连接所述基座(11)，并通过多个第二支撑件(152)连接所述防抖支架(12)，以使所述防抖支架(12)与所述导向支架(14)的相对运动方向不同于所述导向支架(14)与所述基座(11)的相对运动方向。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，所述防抖支架(12)还包括第三边部(12f)和第四边部(12g)，所述第三边部(12f)连接所述第三角部(12e)且与所述第一边部(12b)相对设置，所述第四边部(12g)连接所述第一角部(12a)且与所述第二边部(12d)相对设置；
    所述马达(1)还包括对焦支架(21)、对焦磁性件(222)及对焦线圈(221)，所述对焦支架(21)位于所述防抖支架(12)的内侧，所述对焦磁性件(222)固定于所述对焦支架(21)，所述对焦线圈(221)固定于所述第三边部(12f)或所述第四边部(12g)，且面向所述对焦磁性件(222)设置，用于驱动所述对焦支架(21)相对所述防抖支架(12)沿所述第三方向运动。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，所述第三边部(12f)或所述第四边部(12g)设有通孔(126)，所述对焦线圈(221)至少部分位于所述通孔(126)，所述马达(1)还包括对焦电路板(231)，所述对焦线圈(221)通过所述对焦电路板(231)固定于所述防抖支架(12)。
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，三个所述支撑部(141、143、145)包括第一支撑部(141)、第二支撑部(143)及第三支撑部(145)，所述导向支架(14)还包括第一连接部(142)和第二连接部(144)，所述第一连接部(142)连接所述第一支撑部(141)与所述第二支撑部(143)，所述第二连接部(144)连接所述第二支撑部(143)与所述第三支撑部(145)；
    所述防抖支架(12)具有活动空间(124)，所述第一连接部(142)位于所述第一边部(12b)及所述第一防抖磁性件(132)背向所述活动空间(124)的一侧，所述第二连接部(144)位于所述第二边部(12d)及所述第二防抖磁性件(134)背向所述活动空间(124)的一侧。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，所述第一连接部(142)包括第一本体(142a)和嵌设于所述第一本体(142a)的第一加强件(142b)，所述第一加强件(142b)的强度大于所述第一本体(142a)的强度；
    所述第一本体(142a)呈板状，所述第一本体(142a)于所述第三方向的尺寸大于所述第一本体(142a)于所述第一方向的尺寸；所述第一加强件(142b)呈板状，所述第一加强件(142b)于所述第三方向的尺寸小于所述第一加强件(142b)于所述第一方向的尺寸。
  6. 根据权利要求1至5中任一项所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，所述马达(1)还包括防抖磁吸件(16)，所述防抖磁吸件(16)固定于所述基座(11)，且面向所述第一防抖磁性件(132)和所述第二防抖磁性件(134)设置，所述防抖磁吸件(16)与所述第一防抖磁性件(132)及所述第二防抖磁性件(134)之间的磁性力，使得所述基座(11)、所述第一支撑件(151)、所述导向支架(14)、所述第二支撑件(152)及所述防抖支架(12)之间保持接触。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，所述防抖磁吸件(16)包括第一防抖磁吸件(161) 和第二防抖磁吸件(162)；所述第一防抖磁吸件(161)面向所述第一防抖磁性件(132)设置，所述第一防抖磁吸件(161)与所述第一角部(12a)之间的中心距离小于所述第一防抖磁吸件(161)与所述第二角部(12c)之间的中心距离；所述第二防抖磁吸件(162)面向所述第二防抖磁性件(134)设置，所述第二防抖磁吸件(162)与所述第三角部(12e)之间的中心距离小于所述第二防抖磁吸件(162)与所述第二角部(12c)之间的中心距离。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，所述第一防抖磁吸件(161)正对所述第一防抖磁性件(132)设置，所述第一防抖磁吸件(161)在所述第一方向上的尺寸大于所述第一防抖磁性件(132)在所述第一方向上的尺寸；和/或，所述第二防抖磁吸件(162)正对所述第二防抖磁性件(134)，所述第二防抖磁吸件(162)在所述第二方向上的尺寸大于所述第二防抖磁性件(134)在所述第二方向上的尺寸。
  9. 根据权利要求6至8中任一项所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，所述基座(11)包括底板(111)和侧框(112)，所述侧框(112)连接于所述底板(111)的周缘，所述第一防抖线圈(131)、所述第二防抖线圈(133)及所述防抖磁吸件(16)均固定于所述底板(111)，所述防抖支架(12)位于所述侧框(112)的内侧，三个所述支撑部(141、143、145)位于所述防抖支架(12)与所述底板(111)之间。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，所述马达(1)还包括多个第一簧片(18)，多个所述第一簧片(18)的排布平面垂直于所述第三方向，且位于所述防抖支架(12)背向所述底板(111)的一侧，部分所述第一簧片(18)连接所述第一边部(12b)与所述侧框(112)，另一部分所述第一簧片(18)连接所述第二边部(12d)与所述侧框(112)。
  11. 根据权利要求6至8中任一项所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，所述基座(11)包括底板(111)、侧框(112)以及顶板(113)，所述顶板(113)与所述底板(111)相对设置，所述侧框(112)连接于所述底板(111)与所述顶板(113)之间，所述第一防抖线圈(131)和所述第二防抖线圈(133)固定于所述底板(111)，所述防抖磁吸件(16)固定于所述顶板(113)，所述防抖支架(12)位于所述侧框(112)的内侧，三个所述支撑部(141、143、145)位于所述防抖支架(12)与所述顶板(113)之间。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，所述马达(1)还包括多个第一簧片(18)，多个所述第一簧片(18)的排布平面平行于所述第三方向，且位于所述防抖支架(12)背向所述第一边部(12b)或所述第二边部(12d)的一侧，多个所述第一簧片(18)连接所述防抖支架(12)与所述底板(111)。
  13. 根据权利要求11或12所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，所述顶板(113)呈L形，所述顶板(113)与所述导向支架(14)对应设置；和/或，所述防抖磁吸件(16)位于所述顶板(113)背向所述导向支架(14)的一侧，所述防抖磁吸件(16)为一体结构件。
  14. 根据权利要求1至8中任一项所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，所述第一防抖线圈(131)包括第一子线圈(1311)和第二子线圈(1312)，所述基座(11)包括底板(111)、侧框(112)以及顶板(113)，所述顶板(113)与所述底板(111)相对设置，所述侧框(112)连接于所述底板(111)与所述顶板(113)之间，所述防抖支架(12)位于所述侧框(112)的内侧，所述第一子线圈(1311)固定于所述底板(111)且面向所述第一防抖磁性件(132)设置，所述第二子线圈(1312)固定于所述顶板(113)且面向所述第一防抖磁性件(132)设置。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，所述第一子线圈(1311)、所述第一防抖磁性件(132)以及所述第二子线圈(1312)在所述第三方向上对齐设置；
    或者，在所述第一方向上，所述第一子线圈(1311)相对所述第一防抖磁性件(132)向一侧偏置，所述第二子线圈(1312)相对所述第二防抖磁性件(134)向另一侧偏置。
  16. 根据权利要求14或15所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，所述第一防抖磁性件(132)包括排布于所述第三方向的第一子磁性件(1321)和第二子磁性件(1322)，所述第一子磁性件(1321)与所述第二子磁性件(1322)的极性方向的排布一致，且均具有相反的两个极性方向；
    或者，所述第一防抖磁性件(132)由第一磁石(1323)和第二磁石(1324)组成，所述第一磁石(1323)和所述第二磁石(1324)排布于所述第一方向，所述第一磁石(1323)的极性方向与所述第二磁石(1324)的极性方向相反；
    或者，所述第一防抖磁性件(132)为海尔贝克磁石阵列；
    或者，所述第一防抖磁性件(132)由一块磁石组成，且所述磁石包括极性方向相反的两个部分。
  17. 根据权利要求14或15所述的马达(1)，其特征在于，所述第一防抖磁性件(132)包括第一子磁性件(1321)和第二子磁性件(1322)，所述马达(1)还包括第一防抖导磁件(135)，所述第一防抖导磁件(135)包括第一部分(135a)和连接所述第一部分(135a)的第二部分(135b)，所述第一部分(135a) 嵌入所述第一边部(12b)，所述第二部分(135b)相对所述防抖支架(12)露出，所述第一子磁性件(1321)固定于所述第二部分(135b)的一侧表面，所述第二子磁性件(1322)固定于所述第二部分(135b)的另一侧表面，所述第一子磁性件(1321)、所述第一防抖导磁件(135)及所述第二子磁性件(1322)排布于所述第三方向。
  18. 一种摄像模组(100)，其特征在于，包括镜头(2)、图像传感器(5)以及权利要求1至17中任一项所述的马达(1)，所述镜头(2)安装于所述马达(1)，所述图像传感器(5)位于所述镜头(2)的出光侧。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的摄像模组(100)，其特征在于，所述摄像模组(100)还包括可变光圈(3)，所述可变光圈(3)位于所述镜头(2)的进光侧。
  20. 一种电子设备(1000)，其特征在于，包括设备壳体(200)以及如权利要求18或19所述的摄像模组(100)，所述摄像模组(100)设于所述设备壳体(200)。
PCT/CN2024/074352 2023-02-15 2024-01-27 马达、摄像模组以及电子设备 Ceased WO2024169571A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP24755946.1A EP4579320A4 (en) 2023-02-15 2024-01-27 MOTOR, CAMERA MODULE AND ELECTRONIC DEVICE
US19/178,025 US20250244637A1 (en) 2023-02-15 2025-04-14 Motor, camera module, and electronic device

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202310146129 2023-02-15
CN202310146129.2 2023-02-15
CN202310312152.4 2023-03-21
CN202310312152.4A CN117590619B (zh) 2023-02-15 2023-03-21 马达、摄像模组以及电子设备

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US19/178,025 Continuation US20250244637A1 (en) 2023-02-15 2025-04-14 Motor, camera module, and electronic device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024169571A1 true WO2024169571A1 (zh) 2024-08-22

Family

ID=89912130

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2024/074352 Ceased WO2024169571A1 (zh) 2023-02-15 2024-01-27 马达、摄像模组以及电子设备

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US20250244637A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4579320A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN117590619B (zh)
WO (1) WO2024169571A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN119758650B (zh) * 2023-09-27 2025-10-17 宁波舜宇光电信息有限公司 一种镜头驱动装置以及摄像模组
CN221553362U (zh) * 2023-11-27 2024-08-16 常州市瑞泰光电有限公司 一种摄像装置及电子设备
CN118945455A (zh) * 2024-04-15 2024-11-12 华为技术有限公司 摄像模组及电子设备
CN120835194A (zh) * 2024-04-18 2025-10-24 华为技术有限公司 马达、摄像模组及电子设备
WO2025245854A1 (zh) * 2024-05-31 2025-12-04 瑞声光电科技(常州)有限公司 传感器驱动装置
CN121239926A (zh) * 2024-06-29 2025-12-30 华为终端有限公司 一种折叠电路板结构、防抖云台、摄像装置及电子设备
CN119316712B (zh) * 2024-09-24 2025-10-28 华为技术有限公司 马达、摄像头模组及电子设备
CN121770281A (zh) * 2024-09-30 2026-03-31 华为技术有限公司 马达、摄像模组及电子设备

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106707454A (zh) * 2015-11-13 2017-05-24 三星电机株式会社 镜头驱动设备和包括该镜头驱动设备的相机模块
CN111650715A (zh) * 2020-06-15 2020-09-11 瑞声通讯科技(常州)有限公司 镜头模组
CN112965317A (zh) * 2021-02-26 2021-06-15 北京可利尔福科技有限公司 光学防抖马达及摄像模组
CN215186392U (zh) * 2021-04-20 2021-12-14 北京可利尔福科技有限公司 光学防抖马达
CN113890978A (zh) * 2021-10-19 2022-01-04 江西晶浩光学有限公司 驱动结构、摄像模组及电子设备
CN114614629A (zh) * 2022-05-10 2022-06-10 基合半导体（宁波）有限公司 防抖马达、摄像模组及电子设备
WO2022142683A1 (zh) * 2020-12-31 2022-07-07 上海比路电子股份有限公司 防抖结构、防抖系统及摄像装置
CN217181355U (zh) * 2022-04-21 2022-08-12 河南皓泽电子股份有限公司 光学元件驱动机构
CN217883580U (zh) * 2022-07-19 2022-11-22 辽宁中蓝光电科技有限公司 一种防抖马达

Family Cites Families (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4862411B2 (ja) * 2006-01-30 2012-01-25 ソニー株式会社 像ぶれ補正装置、レンズ装置及び撮像装置
JP4829803B2 (ja) * 2007-01-26 2011-12-07 キヤノン株式会社 光学防振装置及び光学機器
JP4876952B2 (ja) * 2007-02-13 2012-02-15 カシオ計算機株式会社 手ぶれ補正装置及びプログラム
US8830583B2 (en) * 2011-02-28 2014-09-09 Hoya Corporation Position controller for removable optical element
EP3045949B1 (en) * 2015-01-16 2020-03-25 LG Innotek Co., Ltd. Lens driving device, camera module and optical apparatus
US10928702B2 (en) * 2018-03-20 2021-02-23 Samsung Electro-Mechanics Co., Ltd. Portable electronic apparatus and camera module
EP4258642B1 (en) * 2020-12-11 2026-01-28 Ningbo Sunny Opotech Co., Ltd. Drive apparatus and camera module
US11808951B2 (en) * 2020-12-11 2023-11-07 Samsung Electro-Mechanics Co., Ltd. Actuator for camera, and camera module including the same
KR102728736B1 (ko) * 2021-02-05 2024-11-11 삼성전기주식회사 카메라용 액추에이터, 카메라 모듈 및 이를 포함하는 휴대용 전자기기
CN113589410B (zh) * 2021-06-30 2022-10-18 荣耀终端有限公司 驱动液态镜头的马达、镜头组件以及终端设备
CN215344794U (zh) * 2021-08-03 2021-12-28 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 拍摄装置以及电子设备
JP7100777B1 (ja) * 2022-03-31 2022-07-13 エーエーシー オプティックス （ソシュウ） カンパニーリミテッド 撮像装置及び携帯電子機器
CN217825083U (zh) * 2022-05-25 2022-11-15 欧菲光集团股份有限公司 摄像模组及电子设备
CN115002316B (zh) * 2022-05-27 2025-02-28 维沃移动通信有限公司 摄像组件、电子设备和摄像方法
CN115696038A (zh) * 2022-08-24 2023-02-03 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 音圈马达、摄像头模组及电子设备

Patent Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106707454A (zh) * 2015-11-13 2017-05-24 三星电机株式会社 镜头驱动设备和包括该镜头驱动设备的相机模块
CN111650715A (zh) * 2020-06-15 2020-09-11 瑞声通讯科技(常州)有限公司 镜头模组
WO2021253520A1 (zh) * 2020-06-15 2021-12-23 诚瑞光学(常州)股份有限公司 镜头模组
WO2022142683A1 (zh) * 2020-12-31 2022-07-07 上海比路电子股份有限公司 防抖结构、防抖系统及摄像装置
CN112965317A (zh) * 2021-02-26 2021-06-15 北京可利尔福科技有限公司 光学防抖马达及摄像模组
CN215186392U (zh) * 2021-04-20 2021-12-14 北京可利尔福科技有限公司 光学防抖马达
CN113890978A (zh) * 2021-10-19 2022-01-04 江西晶浩光学有限公司 驱动结构、摄像模组及电子设备
CN217181355U (zh) * 2022-04-21 2022-08-12 河南皓泽电子股份有限公司 光学元件驱动机构
CN114614629A (zh) * 2022-05-10 2022-06-10 基合半导体（宁波）有限公司 防抖马达、摄像模组及电子设备
CN217883580U (zh) * 2022-07-19 2022-11-22 辽宁中蓝光电科技有限公司 一种防抖马达

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4579320A4

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117590619B (zh) 2024-07-30
US20250244637A1 (en) 2025-07-31
EP4579320A1 (en) 2025-07-02
CN117590619A (zh) 2024-02-23
EP4579320A4 (en) 2026-01-21

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2024169571A1 (zh) 马达、摄像模组以及电子设备
CN117590618B (zh) 马达、摄像模组以及电子设备
US20220229348A1 (en) Optical element driving mechanism
CN104038682B (zh) 便携终端的摄像头模块
CN104698721B (zh) 镜头驱动装置
US9723211B2 (en) Camera module with image stabilization by moving imaging lens
CN102879973B (zh) 透镜架驱动装置
WO2021104013A1 (zh) 摄像头模组及电子设备
KR101535548B1 (ko) 휴대 단말기의 카메라 렌즈 모듈
CN217689714U (zh) 光学元件驱动机构
CN115903338A (zh) 摄像装置模块以及光学装置
KR20230061307A (ko) 카메라 장치 및 광학기기
CN102870043A (zh) 倾斜修正单元
WO2020082412A1 (zh) 单轴防抖的移轴防抖对焦模块及潜望式防抖模组
WO2025060862A1 (zh) 摄像模组以及电子设备
WO2025044365A1 (zh) 感光组件、摄像头模组以及电子设备
WO2025031264A1 (zh) 马达、摄像模组及电子设备
CN111740561A (zh) 透镜驱动机构、透镜驱动装置、照相装置、电子产品
WO2026066833A1 (zh) 马达、摄像头模组及电子设备
CN118843816A (zh) 镜头组件、摄像模组以及电子设备
WO2025146015A1 (zh) 马达、摄像模组以及电子设备
CN114911025A (zh) 一种潜望式镜头驱动装置、摄像装置及移动终端
WO2020082411A1 (zh) 一种平板弹片及转动防抖反射模块
CN115407475B (zh) 光学镜头、摄像模组以及电子设备
US20220334453A1 (en) Lens module

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24755946

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2024755946

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2024755946

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20250326

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2024755946

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE